Allen-Bradley SLC 500 User Manual
Allen-Bradley SLC 500 is a modular hardware style PLC system designed for a wide range of industrial applications, manufactured by Rockwell Automation. It offers a variety of features and options to meet the specific needs of your application. With its modular design, you can easily customize your system by selecting the appropriate modules for your input and output requirements.
Advertisement
Advertisement
SLC 500™ Modular
Hardware Style
(Cat. Nos. 1747-L511, 1747-L514,
1747-L524, 1747-L531, 1747-L532,
1747-L541, 1747-L542, 1747-L543,
1747-L551, 1747-L552, 1747-L553)
User Manual
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell International Corporation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication.
Rockwell Automation publication SGI-1.1,
Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control
(available from your local Rockwell Automation office), describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication.
Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication, in whole or part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations:
ATTENTION
!
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss
Attention statements help you to:
• identify a hazard
• avoid a hazard
• recognize the consequences
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
PLC-5 is a registered trademark; and MicroLogix, SLC 500, RSLogix, and RSLinx are trademarks of Rockwell Automation.
Modbus is a trademark of Schneider Automation Incorporated.
DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA).
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing.
To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph.
The table below lists the sections that document new features and additional or updated information on existing features.
For this information See
Updated references to related publications
1747-P6 and 1747-P7 power supplies wiring heat dissipation
Updated SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 communication parameters table
1784-PKTX interface card
A list of processors supporting ASCII instructions
Information on DeviceNet and ControlNet capabilities
Selecting a memory module for SLC 5/03,
5/04 and 5/05 processors - revised
Revised recommended surge suppressor catalog numbers
Revised grounding diagram
1746-BAS-T module
Minimizing noise when using SLC 5/04 processor
Updated power supply loading worksheet
Updated heat dissipation worksheet
iii
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Summary of Changes
iv
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
Preface
Who Should Use this Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Purpose of this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Common Techniques Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Rockwell Automation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Local Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Technical Product Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual . . . . . . . . P-4
Chapter 1
Quick Start for Experienced Users
Required Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
v
Chapter 2
Selecting Your Hardware
Components
European Union Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Overview of Your Modular Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Principles of Machine Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Selecting Modular Processors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Processor Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Processor Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
SLC 500 System Test General Specifications. . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Processor General Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Memory Backup for the 1747-L511, SLC 5/01 Processor . 2-12
Selecting Discrete I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Selecting Specialty I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Selecting Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Power Supply Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Example for Selecting Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply . 2-16
Selecting Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Selecting Operator Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Programming with a Hand-Held Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Selecting a Memory Module for the SLC 5/01 and
SLC 5/02 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
EEPROM Burning Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Selecting Isolation Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Special Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Class I, Division 2 Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Selecting Contact Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
vi
System Installation
Recommendations
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control
System
Identifying the Components of
Your Processor
Chapter 3
Typical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Spacing Your Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Preventing Excessive Heat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Grounding Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Special Grounding Considerations for DC
Applications using 1746-P3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Modification to the SLC 500 Series A Chassis . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Determining the Date of the SLC 500 Series A Chassis . . 3-7
Master Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Emergency-Stop Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Common Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Isolation Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Grounded ac Power-Distribution System with
Master-Control Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Loss of Power Source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Input States on Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Other Types of Line Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Disconnecting Main Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Safety Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit . . . . . . . . 3-13
Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Chapter 4
Mounting Modular Hardware Style Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
7-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
10-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
13-Slot Modular Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Link Coupler (AIC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC)
DeviceNet Interface (1761-NET-DNI)
Ethernet Interface (1761-NET-ENI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Chapter 5
SLC 5/01 Processor Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SLC 5/02 Processor Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
SLC 5/03 Processor Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
SLC 5/04 Processor Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
SLC 5/05 Processor Hardware Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
vii
Installing Your Hardware
Components
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
RUN Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
PROG Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
REM Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Chapter 6
Compliance to European Union Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Installing Your Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Installing Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Installing Your Memory Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Removing the Memory Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Installing Your Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Installing Your Chassis Interconnect Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Chapter 7
Defining Sinking and Sourcing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Contact Output Circuits — AC or DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Solid-State DC I/O Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Preparing Your Wiring Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Recommendations for Wiring I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Features of an I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Wiring Your I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Octal Label Kit Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Applying the Octal Filter Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Applying the Octal Door Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Octal Kit and I/O Module Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Using the Removable Terminal Block (RTB). . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Removing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Installing the RTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Chapter 8
Starting Up Your Control System
Procedures for Starting the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
1. Inspect Your Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
2. Disconnect Motion-Causing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
3. Initialize and Test Your Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
4. Test Your Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Input Troubleshooting Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
5. Test Your Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Output Troubleshooting Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
6. Enter and Test Your Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
7. Observe Control Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
viii
Chapter 9
Maintaining Your Control System
Handling and Storing Battery, Catalog Number 1747-BA . . . 9-1
Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Replacing Your SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Battery . . . 9-4
Replacing Retainer Clips on an I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Removing Damaged Retainer Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Installing New Retainer Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Replacing a Fuse on the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 10
Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Tips for Troubleshooting Your Control System . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Removing Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Program Alteration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Troubleshooting the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processors . . . 10-3
Identifying SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors. . . . 10-4
Identifying SLC 5/02 Processor Communication Errors . . 10-7
Troubleshooting the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Clearing SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processor Faults Using the Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processor Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processor Communication Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Identifying Processor Errors while Downloading an
Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Returning the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors to “Initial Factory Conditions” . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
Troubleshooting Your Input Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Input Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
Troubleshooting Your Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Troubleshooting Your Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Output Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Troubleshooting Your Output Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
ix
Replacement Parts
Chapter 11
Replacement Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Cable Connectivity Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Replacement Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Other Replacement Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Appendix A
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
DH-485 Network Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
DH-485 Network Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
DH-485 Token Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
DH-485 Network Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Devices that Use the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler for DH-485 . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Example System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Configuring the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Channel 0 for DH485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Important Planning Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Hardware Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Software Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Installing the DH-485 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
DH-485 Communication Cable and Isolated
Link Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Installing the DH-485 Communication Cable . . . . . . . . A-11
Connecting the Communication Cable to the
Isolated Link Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Powering the Link Coupler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Installing and Attaching the Link Couplers . . . . . . . . . A-17
Appendix B
RS-232 Communication Interface
RS-232 and SCADA Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
RS-232 Communication Interface Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors and RS-232
Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
SLC 500 Devices that Support RS-232 Communication. . . . . B-3
1770-KF3 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
1747-KE Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
1746-BAS and 1746-BAS-T Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
DF1 Protocol and the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Full-Duplex (Point-to-Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
ASCII Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
DF1 Communication Protocol Modems Overview. . . . . . . . B-7
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
x
Setting Up the DH+ Network
Wiring Connectors for RS-232 Communication . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Types of RS-232 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
DTE Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
DCE Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Pin Assignments for Wiring Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9
Applications for the RS-232 Communication Interface . . . . B-20
DF1 Full-Duplex Peer-to-Peer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-20
Half-Duplex with Slave-to-Slave Routing . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Appendix C
Data Highway Plus Communication Protocol Overview . . . C-1
SLC 5/04 Processors and DH+ Communication . . . . . . . . . . C-2
DH+ Channel 1, 3-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
DH+ Channel 1, 8-Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2
Wiring Connectors for DH+ Communication for SLC 5/04
Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
Minimizing Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Typical DH+ Network Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Control Networks
Appendix D
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Remote I/O Passthru . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
DeviceNet Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
The 1747-SDN DeviceNet Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
The 1761-NET-DNI DeviceNet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
DeviceNet Network Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
ControlNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
The 1747-SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module . . . . . . . . . D-6
The 1747-KFC15 ControlNet Messaging Module. . . . . . . D-6
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Appendix E
SLC 5/05 Processors and Ethernet Communication . . . . . . . E-1
SLC 5/05 Performance Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
SLC 5/05 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network. . . . E-3
Ethernet Network Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
Ethernet Channel 1 8-Pin 10Base-T Connector. . . . . . . . E-3
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the SLC 5/05 . . . . . . . E-5
Configuration Using RSLogix 500 Programming Software . . E-6
Configuration Via BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Using DOS/Windows BOOTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Run the Boot Server Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
xi
Power Supply Worksheet
Using Subnet Masks and Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
Using BOOTP to Configure Channel 1 for
Processors on Subnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Appendix F
Power Supply Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Blank Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Appendix G
Definition of Key Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Calculating Module Heat Dissipation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Calculated Watts vs. Total Watts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Power Supply Loading Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
Power Supply Heat Dissipation Graphs. . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
Example Heat Dissipation Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation. . . G-8
Blank Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation . . . . . G-9
Glossary
Index
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Table of Contents
xii
Publication 1746-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Preface
Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual. It provides information concerning:
• who should use this manual
• the purpose of this manual
• related documentation
• conventions used in this manual
•
Rockwell Automation support
Who Should Use this
Manual
Use this manual if you are responsible for designing, installing, programming, or troubleshooting control systems that use SLC 500 programmable controllers.
You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic. If you do not, obtain the proper training before using this product.
Purpose of this Manual
This manual describes the procedures you use to install, wire, and troubleshoot your controller. This manual:
• explains how to install and wire your controllers
• gives you an overview of the SLC 500 programmable controller system
Refer to publication 1747-RM001C-EN-P,
SLC 500 Instruction Set
Reference Manual
for the SLC 500 instruction set and for application examples to show the instruction set in use. Refer to your programming software user documentation for more information on programming your SLC 500 programmable controller.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
P-2
Preface
Related Documentation
The following documents contain additional information concerning
Rockwell Automation products. To obtain a copy, contact your local
Rockwell Automation office or distributor.
For
An overview of the SLC 500 family of products.
In-depth information on the SLC Instruction Set.
A description on how to install and use your Fixed
SLC 500 programmable controller.
Read this Document
SLC 500 System Overview
SLC 500 Instruction Set
Reference Manual
Installation & Operation
Manual for Fixed Hardware
Style Programmable
Controllers
Allen-Bradley Hand-Held
Terminal User Manual
A procedural and reference manual for technical personnel who use an HHT to develop control applications.
An introduction to HHT for first-time users, containing basic concepts but focusing on simple tasks and exercises, and allowing the reader to begin programming in the shortest time possible.
A description on how to install and connect an
AIC+. This manual also contains information on network wiring.
Information on how to install, configure, and commission a DNI.
A description on how to install a PLC-5® system.
Information on DF1 open protocol.
In-depth information on grounding and wiring
Allen-Bradley programmable controllers.
A description of important differences between solid-state programmable controller products and hard-wired electromechanical devices.
Getting Started Guide for
HHT
Advanced Interface
Converter (AIC+) User
Manual
DeviceNet™ Interface User
Manual
PLC-5 Family Programmable
Controllers Hardware
Installation Manual
DF1 Protocol and Command
Set Reference Manual
Allen-Bradley Programmable
Controller Grounding and
Wiring Guidelines
Application Considerations for Solid-State Controls
Document Number
1747-SO001B-US-P
1747-RM001C-EN-P
1747-6.21
1747-NP002
1747-NM009
1761-6.4
1761-6.5
1785-6.6.1
1770-6.5.16
1770-4.1
SGI-1.1
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Preface
P-3
For
An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment.
A complete listing of current documentation, including ordering instructions. Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD-ROM or in multi-languages.
A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations.
Read this Document
Allen-Bradley Publication
Index
Document Number
National Electrical Code - Published by the
National Fire Protection Association of Boston, MA.
SD499
Allen-Bradley Industrial
Automation Glossary
AG-7.1
Common Techniques Used in this Manual
The following conventions are used throughout this manual:
•
Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not procedural steps.
•
Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information.
•
Italic
type is used for emphasis.
Rockwell Automation
Support
Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide, with over 75
Sales/Support Offices, 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized
Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone, plus
Rockwell Automation representatives in every major country in the world.
Local Product Support
Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for:
• sales and order support
• product technical training
• warranty support
• support service agreements
Technical Product Assistance
If you need to contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance, please review the
Troubleshooting
information in Chapter 10 first.
Then call your local Rockwell Automation representative.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
P-4
Preface
Your Questions or Comments on this Manual
If you find a problem with this manual, or you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you, please contact us at the address below:
Rockwell Automation
Automation Control and Information Group
Technical Communication, Dept. A602V
P.O. Box 2086
Milwaukee, WI 53201-2086
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
1
Quick Start for Experienced Users
This chapter can help you to get started using the SLC 500 Modular
Processors. We base the procedures here on the assumption that you have an understanding of SLC 500 products. You should understand electronic process control and be able to interpret the ladder logic instructions required to generate the electronic signals that control your application.
Because it is a start-up guide for experienced users, this chapter
does not
contain detailed explanations about the procedures listed. It does, however, reference other chapters in this book where you can get more information.
If you have any questions or are unfamiliar with the terms used or concepts presented in the procedural steps,
always read the referenced chapters
and other recommended documentation before trying to apply the information.
This chapter:
• tells you what tools and equipment you need
• lists how to install and wire your power supply
• lists how to install and apply power to your processor
• lists how to establish communications with the processor
• describes how to return the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors to initial factory conditions if required
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1-2
Quick Start for Experienced Users
Required Tools and
Equipment
Have the following tools and equipment ready:
• medium blade screwdriver
• programming equipment
• compatible communication cable and/or interface (The table below indicates with an "X", which cables are compatible with the SLC 5/01 through 5/05 processors.)
Processor
1747-PIC
1747-CP3
1747-KTX, -PKTX
1747-PCMK
10Base-T EtherNet
(1) requires 1784-CP14 cable
(2) requires 1784-PCM4 cable
(3) requires 1784-CP13 cable
(4) requires 1784-PCM6 cable
SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05
X X X
X X X
X
(1)
X
(2)
X
(3)
X
(4)
X
Procedures
1.
Check the contents of the shipping box.
Unpack the shipping boxes making sure that the contents include:
•
SLC 500 Modular Processor
–
installation instructions (Publication 1747-5.25 or 1747-IN009A-EN-P)
•
SLC 500 Modular Chassis (Catalog Numbers 1746-A4, 1746-A7, 1746-A10, or
1746-A13)
–
installation instructions (Publication Number 1746-IN016A-EN-P)
•
SLC 500 Modular Power Supplies (Catalog Numbers 1746-P1, 1746-P2,
1746-P3, 1746-P4, 1746-P5, 1746-P6, or 1746-P7)
–
installation instructions (Publication Number 1746-IN004A-ML-P)
Reference
If the contents are incomplete, call your local Rockwell Automation representative for assistance.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Quick Start for Experienced Users
1-3
2.
Install the power supply.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Align the circuit board of the power supply with the card guides on the left side of the chassis, and slide the power supply in until it is flush with the chassis.
Reference
(Installing Your
Hardware Components)
2.
Fasten the power supply to the chassis.
Use these screws to fasten the power supply to the chassis.
1.2 Nm (11 in-lbs.) maximum torque
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1-4
Quick Start for Experienced Users
3.
Make jumper selection for 120/240V ac on 1746-P1, 1746-P2, and 1746-P4 power supplies.
Reference
Place the input voltage jumper to match the input voltage. This does not apply to the 1746-P3, -P5, -P6, or -P7 which do not have jumpers.
(Installing Your
Hardware
Components)
ATTENTION
!
Set the input jumper before applying power. Hazardous voltage is present on exposed pins when power is applied; contact with the pin may cause injury to personnel.
Jumper Selection
Catalog Numbers 1746-P1 and -P2
POWER Jumper Selection
85-132 VAC
Fuse
Catalog Number 1746-P4
POWER
170-265 VAC
100/120 Volts
200/240 Volts
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Quick Start for Experienced Users
1-5
4.
Wire power to the power supply.
Reference
(Installing Your
Hardware
Components)
ATTENTION
!
Turn off incoming power before connecting wires. Failure to do so could cause injury to personnel and/or equipment.
Connect incoming power.
User Power
Incoming Power
User Power
1746-P1 and -P2
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
120/240V ac
V ac NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
1746-P4
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
85 to 132V ac
JUMPER
170 to 265V ac
Incoming Power
User Power
Incoming
Power
User Power
Incoming
Power
L1: 85 to 132/170 to 265V ac
User Power
L2: NEUTRAL
Incoming
Power
CHASSIS GROUND
1746-P3
NOT USED
NOT USED
+24V dc dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
1746-P5
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
+125V dc dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
1746-P6
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
+48V dc dc NEUT
CHASSIS GROUND
Incoming
Power
1746-P7
NOT USED
IMPORTANT
Terminal screws on the 1746-P1, -P2, -P3,
-P5, -P6, and -P7 should be tightened with a maximum torque of 1 Nm (8.8 in-lbs.).
NOT USED
+12/24V dc
Terminal screws on the 1746-P4 should be dc NEUT tightened with a max torque of 0.8 Nm
CHASSIS GROUND
(7 in-lbs.).
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1-6
Quick Start for Experienced Users
5.
Install the processor.
IMPORTANT
If your processor has a battery — the battery is an option for the SLC
5/01 (1747-L511) processor — make sure it is connected before installing your processor into the chassis. This provides memory backup for your processor should the controller power supply fail.
Reference
(Selecting Your
Hardware
Components)
Make sure system power is off. Then insert the processor into the 1746 chassis.
IMPORTANT
The SLC 500 Modular Processor must be inserted into the left slot
(slot 0), as shown below. Remove the protective label on the power supply after installing the processor.
(Installing Your
Hardware
Components)
Card
Guide
Protective
Label
Module Release
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Quick Start for Experienced Users
1-7
6.
Apply power to the processor.
Follow the steps below:
1.
Energize the chassis power supply.
2.
Check the chassis power supply and processor LEDs. The power LED on the power supply should be on and the fault LED on the processor should be flashing.
Reference
(Starting Up Your
Control System)
(Troubleshooting)
Power supply and SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 LEDs
POWER
RUN
COMM
CPU FAULT
FORCED I/O
BATTERY LOW
Power supply and SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04 LEDs
POWER
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH485
RS232
The RUN LED on the SLC 5/01 processor is actually labeled “PC RUN.” Also, the SLC
5/01 processor does not have a COMM LED.
Power supply and SLC 5/05 LEDs
POWER RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
ENET
RS232
The DH485 LED on the SLC 5/03 processor is labeled “DH+” on the SLC 5/04 processor.
Refer to the following key to determine the status of the LED indicators:
Indicates the LED is off.
Indicates the LED is on.
Indicates the LED is FLASHING.
Status of LED does not matter.
7.
Load your software.
Refer to your software package’s documentation.
Reference
—
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1-8
Quick Start for Experienced Users
8.
Establish communications to the processor.
Follow the steps below:
Refer to the following to establish communications between the processor and your personal computer.
Reference
(Starting Up Your
Control System)
Processor:
SLC 5/01
SLC 5/02
SLC 5/03
SLC 5/04
SLC 5/05
Procedure:
Connect 1747-PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial port or use a
1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PMCK interface.
Connect 1747-PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial port or use a
1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PMCK interface.
Connect 1747-PIC from the processor to your personal computer serial port or use a
1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PMCK interface, or a 1747-CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial port.
Connect a 1747-CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial port or use a 1784-KTX, -PKTX, or -PCMK interface.
Connect a 1747-CP3 cable from channel 0 of the processor to the personal computer serial port. For Ethernet connection, connect channel 1 of the processor and the PC Ethernet Card to an Ethernet hub using 10Base-T compatible cable.
(1)
1.
Set the communication parameters of software to match the default parameters of the processor:
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and
SLC 5/03 Channel 1
DH-485
19.2K baud
Node Address = 1
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 Only
SLC 5/04 Only
Channel 0 configuration:
DF1 Full Duplex
No Handshaking
19.2K baud
CRC Error Check
Duplicate Packet Detect On
No Parity
1 Stop Bit
Channel 1 configuration:
DH+
57.6K baud
Node Address = 1
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Quick Start for Experienced Users
1-9
9.
(Optional) Return the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor to initial factory conditions.
Use this procedure if the communication channels are shut down due to configuration parameters, or if you absolutely cannot establish communications with the processor.
Reference
(Troubleshooting)
ATTENTION
!
If you return the processor to the initial factory conditions, the communication configurations are returned to their default settings and the user program is cleared.
1.
Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2.
Remove the processor from the chassis.
3.
Disconnect the battery by removing the battery connector from its socket.
4.
Locate the VBB and GND connections on the right side of the motherboard.
5.
Place a small bladed screwdriver across the VBB and GND connections and hold for 60 seconds. This returns the processor to the initial factory conditions.
SLC 5/03 (1747-L531 and 1747-L532)
Mother Board
GND
VBB
Mother Board
Right Side View
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1-10
Quick Start for Experienced Users
SLC 5/04 (1747-L541, 1747-L542, and 1747-L543)
SLC 5/05 (1747-L551, 1747-L552, and 1747-L553)
Mother Board
Right Side View
GND VBB
GND
Mother Board
VBB
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Chapter
2
This chapter provides general information on what your SLC 500 controller can do, an overview of the modular control system, and special considerations for controller installations. It also explains how to select:
• chassis
• modular processors
• discrete I/O modules
• specialty I/O modules
• power supplies
• enclosures
• operator interfaces
• memory modules
• isolation transformers
This chapter does not provide you with all the information that you need to select a complete SLC 500 control system. To do this, we recommend that you use the latest version of the system overview,
SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I/O Modules,
Publication
Number 1747-SO001B-US-P.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-2
Selecting Your Hardware Components
European Union Directive
Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.
EMC Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
•
EN 50081-2
EMC - Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
•
EN 50082-2
EMC - Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Low Voltage Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low
Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2
Programmable Controllers, Part 2 – Equipment Requirements and
Tests.
For specific information required by EN61131-2, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley publications:
•
Industrial Automation, Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for
Noise Immunity
, publication 1770-4.1
•
Automation Systems Catalog
, publication B113
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-3
Overview of Your Modular
Control System
The basic modular controller consists of a chassis, power supply, processor (CPU), Input/Output (I/O modules), and an operator interface device for programming and monitoring. The figure below shows typical hardware components for a modular controller.
Modular Hardware Components
Modular Controller
Power
Supply
Processor
Module
Input
Module
Output
Module
Combination
I/O Module
OR
Programming
Terminal
Programming PC
Chassis
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-4
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Principles of Machine Control
You enter a ladder logic program into the controller using the software. The logic program is based on your electrical relay print diagrams. It contains instructions that direct control of your application.
With the ladder logic program entered into the controller, placing the controller in the Run mode initiates an operating cycle. The controller’s operating cycle consists of a series of operations performed sequentially and repeatedly, unless altered by your ladder logic program.
Service
Comms
➃
➄
Overhead
➀
Input
Scan
Operation
Cycle
Output
Scan
➂
➁
Program
Scan
1.
input scan - the time required for the controller to scan and read all input data; typically accomplished within a few milliseconds.
2.
program scan - the time required for the processor to execute the instruction in the program. The program scan time varies depending on the instruction used and each instruction’s status during the scan time.
IMPORTANT
Subroutine and interrupt instructions within your logic program may cause deviations in the way the operating cycle is sequenced.
3.
output scan - the time required for the controller to scan and write all output data; typically accomplished within a few milliseconds.
4.
service communications - the part of the operating cycle in which communication takes place with other devices, such as an HHT or a personal computer.
5.
housekeeping and overhead - time spent on memory
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Modular
Processors
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-5
SLC 500 modular processors are designed to meet a wide range of applications, from small stand-alone to large distributed systems and from simple to complex applications.
Processor Features
Memory size —
The SLC 500 modular processors memory is user configurable for either data storage or program storage. Memory size ranges from 1K to 64K.
I/O points —
The SLC 5/01 processor supports addressing of up to
3940 I/O. The SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors support addressing of 4096 I/O. The SLC 500 modular processors are supported by over 60 different I/O modules including digital, analog, and intelligent I/O.
Performance —
The SLC 500 modular processors are designed with throughput performance in mind. The program scan time for a typical instruction mix ranges from 0.9 ms/K to 8.0 ms/K depending on the processor. I/O scan times range from 0.25 ms to 2.6 ms depending on the processor and I/O installed in the system.
Advanced instruction support —
The instructions available depends on the processor used. The following table lists the instructions supported by the SLC 500 modular processors.
Instruction Support
Bit
Timer and Controller
Comparison
Basic Math
Move, Copy, and Bit Shift
Sequencer
Jump and Subroutine
Messaging
STI
FIFO/LIFO
PID
Advanced Math and Trig
Indirect Addressing
SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02 SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05
• • • • •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Floating Point Math • • •
• ASCII •
Allen-Bradley PLCs
•
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-6
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Processor Communication Options
The SLC 500 processors support several communication options. The following sections describe the available physical connections and protocol options used by the SLC 500 processors.
Physical Connection Options
Ethernet (10Base-T) channel offers:
•
10 Mbps communication rate
•
ISO/IEC 8802-3STD 802.3 (RJ45) connector for 10Base-T media
•
TCP/IP communication protocol
• built-in isolation
Data Highway Plus (DH+) channel offers:
• communication rates of 57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud
• maximum network length of 3,048m (10,000 ft.) at 57.6K baud
•
Belden 9463 (blue hose) cable connection between nodes (daisy chain connection)
• built-in isolation
DH-485 channel offers:
• configurable isolation via the 1747-AIC or 1761-NET-AIC
• maximum network length of 1219m (4,000 ft.)
•
RS-485 electrical specifications
•
Belden 9842 or Belden 3106A cable connection between nodes
(daisy-chain connection)
RS-232 channel offers:
• communication rates up to 19.2K baud (38.4K baud SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05)
•
Maximum distance between devices is 15.24 m (50 ft.)
•
RS-232C (EIA-232) electrical specifications
• modem support
• built-in isolation
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-7
The table below summarizes the processor channel connections.
Processor
DH-485
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 DH-485 protocol —
Physical Communication Channel
RS-232 DH+
—
— SLC 5/03 Channel 0 —
DH-485
(1)
, DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex
Master/Slave, and ASCII protocols
Channel 1 DH-485 protocol —
SLC 5/04 Channel 0 —
Channel 1 —
SLC 5/05 Channel 0 —
, DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex
Master/Slave, and ASCII protocols
—
Channel 1 —
, DF1 Full-Duplex, DF1 Half-Duplex
Master/Slave, and ASCII protocols
—
—
—
DH+ protocol
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Ethernet
Ethernet TCP/IP protocol
(1) A 1761-NET-AIC is required when connecting to a DH-485 network.
Protocol Options
Ethernet TCP/IP Protocol —
Standard Ethernet, utilizing the TCP/IP protocol, is used as the backbone network in many office and industrial buildings. Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps. This network provides the same capabilities as DH+ or DH-485 networks, plus:
•
SNMP support for Ethernet network management
• optional dynamic configuration of IP addresses using a BOOTP utility
•
SLC 5/05 Ethernet data rate up to 40 times faster than SLC 5/04
DH+ messaging
• ability to message entire SLC 5/05 data files
• much greater number of nodes on a single network possible compared to DH-485 (32) and DH+ (64)
Data Highway Plus (DH
++++
) Protocol —
The Data Highway Plus protocol is used by the PLC-5 family of processors and the SLC 5/04 processor. This protocol is similar to DH-485, except that it can support up to 64 devices (nodes) and runs at faster communication
(baud) rates.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-8
Selecting Your Hardware Components
DH-485 Protocol —
The SLC 500 processors have a DH-485 channel that supports the DH-485 communication network. This network is a multi-master, token-passing network protocol capable of supporting up to 32 devices (nodes). This protocol allows:
• monitoring data and processor status, along with program uploading and downloading of any device on the network from one location
•
SLC processors to pass data to each other (peer-to-peer communication)
• operator interface devices on the network to access data from any SLC processor on the network
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol —
DF1 Full-Duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) allows two devices to communicate with each other at the same time. This protocol allows:
• transmission of information across modems (dial-up, leased line, radio, or direct cable connections)
• communication to occur between Allen-Bradley products and third-party products
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol (Master and Slave) —
DF1 Half-Duplex protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple slave network capable of supporting up to 255 devices (nodes). This protocol also provides modem support and is ideal for SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) applications because of the network capability.
ASCII Protocol —
The ASCII protocol provides connection to other
ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, weigh scales, serial printers, and other intelligent devices.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-9
The following table summarizes the communication options for the
SLC 500 processor family.
Communication
Protocol
SLC 5/01
DH-485 peer-to-peer receive only
— DH-485 via RS232 port
DF1 via RS232 port
(full-duplex or half-duplex master or slave) receive only
(1)
ASCII via RS232 port —
Data Highway Plus
(DH+)
Ethernet receive only
(2)
—
SLC 5/02
Processor
SLC 5/03
receive and initiate receive and initiate
—
—
receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate
(5)
SLC 5/04
— receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate
(9)
SLC 5/05
— receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate receive and initiate
DeviceNet
ControlNet
—
—
— receive and initiate
(3) receive and initiate
(4) receive and initiate
(6) receive and initiate initiate
receive and
receive and initiate receive and initiate
receive and initiate
receive and initiate receive and initiate
receive and initiate
(1) A 1747-KE or 1770-KF3 is required to bridge from DF1 (full-duplex or half-duplex slave only) to DH485.
(2) A 1785-KA5 is required to bridge from DH+ to DH-485.
(3) A 1747-SDN module is required for scanning I/O and for explicit messaging on DeviceNet.
(4) A 1747-SCNR module is required for scanning I/O and for explicit messaging on ControlNet.
(5) Either a 1785-KA5 is required to bridge from DH+ to DH-485 or the SLC 5/04’s channel-to-channel passthru feature may be used to bridge between DH+ and DH-485 or between DH+ and DF1 full-duplex (DH+ to DF1 full-duplex passthru available starting with OS401). Another option is to use the 1785-KE to bridge between DH+ and DF1 full-duplex or DH+ and DF1 half-duplex master/slave network.
(6) A 1761-NET-ENI is required to bridge from DF1 full-duplex to Ethernet.
(7) A 1761-NET-DNI is required to bridge from DF1 to DeviceNet.
(8) A 1747-KFC15 module or 1770-KFC15 interface is required to bridge from DF1 to ControlNet.
(9) If using 1747-AIC for isolation, connect to DH-485 network using 1747-PIC. If using a 1761-NET-AIC for isolation, directly connect to DH-485 network with 1747-CP3 serial cable (or equivalent RS-232 null-modem cable).
TIP
The 1785-KA5 and 1785-KE modules require use of a
1771-series chassis and power supply.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-10
Selecting Your Hardware Components
SLC 500 System Test General Specifications
The table below lists SLC 500 system test specifications.
Description
Temperature
Humidity
Vibration
Shock
Free Fall (drop test)
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Safety
Certification
Specification
Operating: 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F)
Storage: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
5 to 95% without condensation
Industry Standard
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Operating: 1.0G at 5 - 2000 Hz
Non-operating: 2.5Gs at 5 - 2000 Hz
Operating: (all modules except relay contact) 30.0Gs (3 pulses, 11 ms)
Operating: (relay contact modules - OW, OX, IO combo)
10.0Gs (3 pulses, 11 ms)
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Non-operating: 50.0Gs (3 pulses, 11 ms)
Portable, 2.268 kg (5 lbs) or less at 0.762 m (30 in.) (six drops)
Portable, 2.268 kg (5 lbs) or more at 0.1016 m (4 in.)
(three flat drops)
Showering Arc: 1.5 KV
Surge Withstand Capability: 3 KV
Not Applicable
NEMA ICS 2-230/NEMA ICS 3-304
IEEE Std. 472-1974/ANSI
C37.90/90A-1974
Internal Allen-Bradley standard
(1) Electrostatic Discharge (ESD): 15 KV,
100 pF/1.5 Kohm model
Radiated Electromagnetic Susceptibility: 5W walkie-talkie at 464.5 MHz and 153.05 MHz
Dielectric Withstand: 1500V ac
Isolation between Communication Circuits: 500V dc
Isolation between Backplane and I/Os: 1500V ac
Flammability and Electrical Ignition: UL94V-0
UL listed/CSA approved
Class 1, Groups A, B, C or D, Division 2
CE compliant for all applicable directives
Internal Allen-Bradley standard
UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 142
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
(1) Internal Allen-Bradley standards are based on Allen-Bredley’s extensive experience in industrial controls. They are also based partly on industry and/or military specifications.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-11
Processor General Specifications
The table below lists general specifications for SLC 500 modular processors.
Specification
(1747-)
SLC 5/01
L511
1K Program Memory
(words)
I/O Capacity 3940 Discrete 4096 Discrete
Remote I/O Capacity Not Applicable
Maximum
Chassis/Slots
3 Chassis/30 Slots of I/O
Processor memory and chassis power limit up to 4096 inputs and 4096 outputs
Standard RAM Capacitor -
2 weeks
(1)
Optional
Lithium
Battery -
5 years
Lithium Battery
2 years
Capacitor - 30 minutes minimum
EEPROM or UVPROM Flash EPROM Memory Back-up
Options
LED Indicators
L514
4K
SLC 5/02
L524
4K
SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04 SLC 5/05
L531 L532 L541 L542 L543 L551 L552 L553
8K 16K 16K 32K 64K 16K 32K 64K
Power Supply
Loading
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
350 mA at 5V dc
105 mA at 24V dc
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
COMM
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
RS-232
DH-485
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
RS-232
DH
+
500 mA at 5V dc 1A at 5V dc
175 mA at 24V dc
200 mA at 24V dc
Run
CPU Fault
Forced I/O
Battery Low
RS-232
Ethernet
Clock/Calendar
Accuracy
Program Scan
Hold-up Time after
Loss of Power
Noise Immunity
Not Applicable ±54 sec./month at +25°C (+77°F); ±81 sec./month at +60°C (+140°F)
20 milliseconds to 3 seconds (dependent on power supply loading)
NEMA Standard ICS 2-230
Temperature Rating Operating: 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F); Storage: -40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
Humidity 5 to 95% without condensation
Shock (operating)
Vibration
Certification
30Gs
Displacement:.015 in., peak-to-peak at 5 - 57 Hz
Acceleration: 2.5Gs at 57 - 2000 Hz
UL listed/CSA approved; Class 1, Groups A, B, C or D, Division 2; CE compliant for all applicable directives
(1) See Capacitor Memory Backup vs. Temperature Curve on page 2-12.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-12
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Memory Backup for the 1747-L511, SLC 5/01 Processor
The curve below illustrates the ability of the memory back-up capacitor to maintain the contents of the RAM in a 1747-L511. To back up the memory for a longer period of time, a lithium battery, Catalog
Number 1747-BA, is required.
Time
(Days)
20
15
10
5
30
25
Capacitor Memory Back-up Time VS Temperature
0
0 5
(41˚F)
10
(50˚F)
15
(59˚F)
20
(68˚F)
25
(77˚F)
30
(86˚F)
Temperature °C (°F)
35
(95˚F)
40
(104˚F)
45
(113˚F)
50
(122˚F)
55
(131˚F)
60
(140˚F)
Selecting Discrete I/O
Modules
There are three types of discrete I/O modules: input, output, and combination. They are available in a wide variety of densities including 4, 8, 16, and 32 point and can interface to AC, DC, and TTL voltage levels. Output modules are available with solid-state AC, solid-state DC, and relay contact type outputs.
For a complete listing of discrete I/O modules and specifications, contact your Allen-Bradley sales office for the latest product data entitled
Discrete Input and Output Modules,
publication 1746-2.35.
Selecting Specialty I/O
Modules
The SLC 500 family offers specialty I/O modules that enhance your control system. Modules range in function from analog interface to motion control, from communication to high-speed counting.
For a complete listing of specialty I/O modules and their specifications, contact your Allen-Bradley sales office for the latest system overview entitled
SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I/O
Modules,
publication 1747-SO001A-US-P, or for a related product data.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-13
Selecting Power Supplies
To select a power supply, you need the following documents:
•
power supply worksheet (See Appendix F) one for each chassis
•
SLC 500 Programmable Controllers and I/O Modules,
publication
1747-SO001B-US-P, or
SLC 500 Modular Chassis and Power
Supplies Technical Data,
publication number
1746-TD003A-EN-P.
When configuring a modular system, you must have a power supply for each chassis. Careful system configuration will result in the best performance. Excessive loading of the power supply outputs can cause a power supply shutdown or premature failure.
There are three different AC power supplies and four DC power supplies. For AC power supplies, the 120/240V selection is made by a jumper. Place the jumper to match the input voltage.
ATTENTION
!
Ensure that the power supply jumper is in the correct position before supplying power to the SLC 500 system or personal injury or damage to the system may result.
SLC power supplies have an LED that illuminates when the power
supply is functioning properly. Page 2-14 lists the general
specifications for the power supplies.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-14
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Power Supply Specifications
Description
Line Voltage
1746-P1 1746-P2
85-132/170-265V ac
47-63 Hz
1746-P3 1746-P4
19.2-28.8V dc 85-132/170-
265V ac
47-63 Hz
90 VA 240 VA
1746-P5
90-146V dc
1746-P6
30 - 60V dc
1746-P7
10 - 30 V dc
Typical Line
Power
Requirement
(1)
Maximum
Inrush Current
Internal
Current
Capacity
135 VA
20A
2A at 5V dc
0.46A at 24V dc
180 VA
20A
5A at 5V dc
0.96A at 24V dc
20A
3.6A at 5V dc
0.87A at 24V dc
45A
10.0A at 5V dc
2.88A at 24V dc
85 VA
20A
5.0A at 5V dc
100 VA
20A
0.96A at 24V dc
12V dc input: 50 VA
24V dc input: 75 VA
20A (required for turn-on)
12V dc input:
2.0A at 5V dc
0.46A at 24V dc
24V dc input:
3.6A at 5V dc
0.87A at 24V dc
See chart on page
Fuse
Protection
(2)
1746-F1 or equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse,
Nagasawa
ULCS-61ML-3 or
BUSSMANN
AGC 3
200 mA
1746-F2 or equivalent:
250V-3A Fuse,
SANO SOC
SD4 or
BUSSMANN
AGC 3
200 mA
1746-F3 or equivalent:
125V-5A Fuse
Nagasawa
ULCS-61ML-5 or BUSSMAN
AGC 5
Not Applicable
Non-replaceable fuse
1A
(3)
200 mA 24V dc User
Power
Current
Capacity
24V dc User
Power
Voltage Range
Ambient
Operating
Temperature
18-30V dc 18-30V dc Not Applicable 20.4-27.6V dc 18-30V dc
Not applicable
Not applicable
0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Current capacity derated 5% above +55°C.
0°C to +60°C
(+32°F to
+140°F) no derating
0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F) Current capacity derated 5% above +55°C.
Storage
Temperature
Humidity
Rating
Wiring
Certification
-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
5-95% (non-condensing) two #14 AWG wires per terminal (maximum)
UL listed, C-UL or CSA certified, CE compliant for all applicable directives,
Class I Division 2 Hazardous Environment Certification
(1) Refer to Appendix F to determine line power requirements for your configuration.
(2) Fuse is intended to guard against fire hazard due to short circuit conditions and may not protect the supply from damage under o verload conditions.
(3) The combination of all output power (5 volt backplane, 24 volt backplane, and 24 volt user source) cannot exceed 70 Watts.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-15
1746-P7 Current Capacity
24V dc
Output
Current
5V dc
Output
Current
.87A
0.625A
0.46A
3.6A
2.64A
2.0A
10V 12.2V 15V 19.2V
30V
Input Voltage (dc)
Example for Selecting Power Supplies
Select a power supply for chassis 1 and chassis 2 in the control system below.
Chassis 1
Chassis 2
DH-485 Network
?
?
IBM PC
HHT
1747-PIC
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
Slot
Chassis 1
0 1 2 3
Slot Numbers
0
1
2
3
Description
Processor Unit
Input Module
Transistor Output
Module
Triac Output Module
Catalog
Number
1747-L511
1747-IV8
1746-OB8
1746-OA16
Perpheral device Hand-Held Terminal 1747-PT1
Power Supply at
5V dc (Amps)
0.350
0.050
0.135
0.370
Not Applicable
Power Supply at
24V dc (Amps)
0.105
0.000
0.000
0.000
Not Applicable
Perpheral device Isolated Link Coupler 1747-AIC
Total Current:
0.000
0.905
0.085
0.190
(1)
(1) Power supply 1746-P1 is sufficient for Chassis #1. The “Internal Current Capacity” for this power supply is 2 Amps at 5V dc,
0.46 Amps at 24V dc.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-16
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Chassis 2
?
Slot
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Slot
Numbers
0
1
2
3, 4, 5, 6
Description Catalog
Number
Power Supply at
5V dc (Amps)
Processor Unit
Output Module
1747-L514
1746-OW16
0.350
0.170
Combination Module 1746-IO12 0.090
Analog Output
Modules
1746-NO4I
Isolated Link Coupler 1747-AIC
0.22 0
(4 x 0.055)
0.000
Power Supply at
24V dc (Amps)
0.105
0.180
.070
0.780
(4 x 0.195)
0.085
Peripheral device
Peripheral device
Total Current:
Interface Converter 1746-PIC Not Applicable Not Applicable
0.830
1.220
(1)
(1) Power Supply 1746-P4 is sufficient for Chassis #2. The “Internal Current Capacity” for this power supply is 10
Amps at 5V dc, 2.88 Amps at 24V dc; not to exceed 70 Watts.
Example Worksheet for Selecting a 1746 Power Supply
If you have a multiple chassis system, make copies of the Power
Supply Worksheet found on page F-4. For a detailed list of device load
currents, refer to the
SLC 500 Modular Chassis and Power Supplies
Technical Data
, Publication Number 1746-TD003A-EN-P.
TIP
Consider future system expansion when selecting a power supply.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-17
Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V maximum currents.
Also include the power consumption of any peripheral devices that may be connected to the processor other than a DTAM, HHT, or PIC—the power consumption of these devices is accounted for in the power consumption of the processor.
Chassis Number 1 Maximum Currents Chassis Number 2 Maximum Currents
Slot Number Catalog Number at 5V dc at 24V dc Slot Number at 5V dc at 24V dc
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
0
1
2
3
Slot
Peripheral Device
1747-L511
1746-IV8
1746-OB8
1746-OA16
1747-AIC
0.350A
0.050A
0.135A
0.370A
-
0.105A
-
-
-
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0.085A
Peripheral Device
Catalog
Number
1747-L514
1746-OW16
1746-NO4I
1746-NO4I
1746-NO4I
1746-NO4I
1746-IO12
1747-AIC
0.350A
0.170A
0.055A
0.055A
0.055A
0.055A
0.090A
-
0.105A
0.180A
0.195A
0.195A
0.195A
0.195A
0.070A
0.085A
Peripheral Device Peripheral Device
2. Add the loading currents of all the system devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current
.
0.905A
0.190A
2. Add the loading currents of all the system devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current
.
0.830A
3. For 1746-P4 power supplies, calculate the total power consumption of all system devices. If you are not using a 1746-P4, go to step 4.
Current
Total Current at 5V dc 0.905A
Multiply by = Watts
5V 4.525W
Current
Total Current at 5V dc 0.830A
1.220A
Multiply by = Watts
5V 4.15W
29.28W
Total Current at 24V dc
User Current at 24V dc
0.190A
0.500A
24V
24V
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
4.56W
Total Current at 24V dc
12.00W
User Current at 24V dc
1.220A
0.500A
24V
24V
21.085W
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
12.00W
45.43W
4. Choose the power supply from the list of catalog numbers shown below. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with th e Internal Current capacity of the power supplies. Be sure that the Total Current consumption for the chassis is less than the Internal Current Capacity for the power supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.
Catalog Number Internal Current
Capacity
Catalog Number Internal Current
Capacity at 5V dc at 24V dc at 5V dc at 24V dc
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
1746-P4 (see step 3)
2.0A
5.0A
3.6A
10.0A
0.46A
0.96A
0.87A
2.88A
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
1746-P4 (see step 3)
2.0A
5.0A
3.6A
10.0A
0.46A
0.96A
0.87A
2.88A
1746-P5
1746-P6
1746-P7
(1)
12V dc input
24V dc input
Required Power Supply
5.0A
5.0A
2.0A
3.6A
0.96A
0.96A
0.46A
0.87A
1746-P1
1746-P5
1746-P6
12V dc input
24V dc input
Required Power Supply
5.0A
5.0A
2.0A
3.6A
0.96A
0.96A
0.46A
0.87A
1746-P4
(1) See P7 currrent capacity chart on page 2-15.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-18
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Selecting Enclosures
The enclosure protects the equipment from atmospheric contamination. Standards established by the National Electrical
Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) define enclosure types, based on the degree of protection an enclosure will provide. Use a fan to circulate the air of sealed enclosures that use convection cooling to dissipate heat. Select a NEMA-rated enclosure that suits your application and environment. The enclosure should be equipped with a disconnect device. To calculate the heat dissipation of your
Selecting Operator
Interfaces
Use an operator interface to program and/or monitor your SLC 500 controller. You can choose from several Allen-Bradley operator interface devices.
Programming with a Hand-Held Terminal
Use the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) to configure the SLC 500 controller, enter/modify a user program, download/upload programs, monitor control operation, and test/troubleshoot. When equipped with a battery (1747-BA), the HHT retains a user program in memory for storage and later use.
The display area accommodates 8 lines x 40 characters. You can display five rungs of a user program. The top row of keys are the menu function keys.
IMPORTANT
Using the HHT, you can program the SLC 5/01 and
SLC 5/02 processors and the SLC 500 fixed controllers. You cannot, however, program SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processors
Programming with an IBM
®
Compatible Computer
Contact Rockwell Software or your local Allen-Bradley distributor for specifications and availability of software packages available to program the SLC 500 Modular Controllers.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-19
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC)
The AIC+ advanced interface converter provides communication links between various networked devices. It has three communication ports: one for DH-485 and two for RS-232. The AIC+ is compatible with a variety of SLC and MicroLogix controllers and peripherals.
DH-485 Interface Converter
For communication with a SLC 5/01, 5/02, or 5/03 processor, use an
RS-232/DH-485 Interface Convertor (Catalog Number 1747-PIC) between the computer and SLC controller. The converter includes a
279.4 mm (11 in.) ribbon cable, already attached to the converter, for connection to the computer serial port and a Catalog Number
1746-C10 cable for connection to the controller.
If you are using an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor, you do not need the 1747-PIC. You can program via the RS-232 channel using
DF1 full-duplex protocol or DH485 protocol and RS-232 Program
Cable (Catalog Number 1747-CP3).
Monitoring with a Data Table Access Module
The Data Table Access Module (DTAM) is a plant floor device that lets you access data file information, change operating modes, monitor and clear processor faults, and transfer the user program between
RAM and an EEPROM memory module with any SLC 5/01, 5/02, or
5/03 family processor. You cannot use it to create new programs.
Important features of DTAM include:
• shorthand addressing, which provides easier access to data files
• display prompts in six, user-selectable languages: English,
French, German, Italian, Spanish, and Japanese
•
UL listed, CSA Certified
•
NEMA type 12 and 13 enclosures
• point-to-point interface to an SLC family processor, or as a network device on a DH-485 network
Monitoring with a PanelView Operator Terminal
The PanelView Operator Terminals provide operator interface capabilities in space-saving, flat-panel designs. Offering optimum viewing angles, these electronic operator interfaces feature pixel graphics and high-performance functionality in both color and monochrome displays. The PanelView Operator Terminals allow you to enter input using function keys or a touch screen, depending upon
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-20
Selecting Your Hardware Components
All PanelView Operator Terminals are available with DF1 or DH-485
(RS-232) communications capability, allowing them to communicate directly with channel 0 on an SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 processor. The larger versions also offer DH-485 (RJ-45), DH+, Remote I/O, Ethernet,
DeviceNet, and ControlNet network connectivity.
The PanelView 300 Micro and 300 Keypad terminals provide compact, low-cost operator interfaces for low-end graphical or text-only applications, each with a 3 inch (7.6 cm) diagonal LCD monochrome graphic display, and DF1, DH-485 (RS-232) and DeviceNet (300
Keypad only) communications capability.
The PanelView 550, with its 5.5 inch (14 cm) diagonal monochrome
LCD display, and PanelView 600, with its 6 inch (15.2 cm) diagonal
TFT active matrix color display, offer keypad, keypad/touch and touch-only versions. Both offer all networking options for maximum flexibility in a smaller form factor.
PanelView 1000 offers keypad and touch screen terminals with 10.4 inch (26.4 cm) diagonal TFT active matrix color or electro-luminescent grayscale displays, and all networking options.
The PanelView 1400, the largest terminal in the PanelView family, has a 14 inch (35.6 cm) diagonal CRT color display and supports all networking options.
Selecting a Memory
Module for the SLC 5/01 and
SLC 5/02 Processors
You can plug these optional EEPROM (Electrically Erasable
Programmable Read Only Memory) memory modules into the SLC 500 controller. With a memory module, you can:
• save the contents of the processor RAM for storage purposes
• load the contents of the EEPROM memory into the processor
RAM
Adapter sockets (1747-M5) are required when inserting EEPROMs or
UVPROMs into the programming and erasing equipment.
To program a memory module, see the
Hand-Held Terminal User
Manual
(Catalog Number 1747-NP002) or your programming software user manual.
EEPROM Memory Modules
These optional memory modules provide a non-volatile memory back-up in a convenient modular form. The modules plug into a socket on the processor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-21
You can store (save) your program in the EEPROM by inserting it into the processor and using either the Hand-Held Terminal or programming software to download the program.
You can use an EEPROM module as a master, or you can use an archived processor file as the source by using the software PROM translator utility.
Adapter sockets are required when inserting memory modules into commercially available PROM programmer. The memory module fits into the adapter socket and then into a PROM programmer.
ATTENTION
Make sure the adapter is inserted properly into the programming equipment or damage could result.
!
The following table lists the types of memory modules that are suitable for the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors.
Catalog
Number
Description
1747-M1 1K User Words EEPROM
1747-M2 4K User Words EEPROM
1747-M5 Adapter Socket
Use with this processor type:
SLC 5/01 SLC 5/02
1747-L511 1747-L514
X X
1747-L524
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Selecting a Memory
Module for SLC 5/03, SLC
5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors
The memory module for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors is called Flash EPROM (Flash Erasable Programmable Read
Only Memory). Flash EPROMs combine the programming versatility of
EEPROMs with the security precautions of UVPROMs. This means that you have the option of leaving your EPROM programs write-protected or unprotected. Write-protect the EPROM using either your software or a PROM programmer.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-22
Selecting Your Hardware Components
The memory modules consist of a Flash EPROM mounted on a circuit board with a connector and plastic housing.
Adapter sockets (1747-M15) are required when inserting memory modules into commercially available PROM programmer.
ATTENTION
Make sure the adapter is inserted properly in the programming equipment or damage could result.
!
See the table below for details on the Flash EPROM and adapter socket.
Catalog
Number
1747-M11
Series A
1747-M11
Series B
Description
Supports up to 32K of user memory backup
(1)
Supports up to 32K of user memory backup
Use with this processsor type:
SLC 5/03 SLC 5/04
1747-L531, 1747-L532 1747-L541, 1747-L542,
1747-L543
SLC 5/05
1747-L551, 1747-L552,
1747-L553
X
(OS300 or OS301)
X
(OS302 or higher)
X
(OS400)
X
(OS401 or higher)
X
1747-M12
Supports up to 64K of user memory backup
X
1747-M13 Supports up to 64K of user memory backup
X
(OS302 or higher)
X
(Series C
OS302 or higher)
X
(OS401 or higher)
X
(Series C
OS401 or higher)
X
(Series C
OS501 or higher)
(1) discontinued/superseded by 1747-M13
To program a memory module, refer to your programming software user manual.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-23
EEPROM Burning Options
You can burn a program into an EEPROM memory module using a processor that is the same or different from the one used to run the program. When burning EEPROMs, keep the following conditions in mind:
•
The processor burning the EEPROM must be of the same type and have the same OS version or lower than the target processor.
•
The program size cannot exceed the processor memory size. For instance, an SLC 5/01 4K processor can burn an EEPROM for a
SLC 5/01 1K processor as long as the program does not exceed
1K.
•
The I/O and chassis configuration of the burning processor does not have to match the I/O configuration of the program being burned.
•
You do not have to enter the Run mode before burning an
EEPROM. If the run mode is entered and the chassis configuration does not match, a major fault will occur. If you burn an EEPROM while in the fault mode, the fault will also be saved in the EEPROM.
The following table summarizes the above conditions as to the type of processor you can use to burn EEPROMs for other processors.
Use these processors
SLC 5/01 (1K)
SLC 5/01 (4K)
SLC 5/02 (4K)
SLC 5/03 (8K)
To burn EEPROMs for these processors:
SLC
5/01
(1K)
SLC
5/01
(4K)
SLC
5/02
(4K)
SLC
5/03
(8K)
SLC
5/03
(16K)
•
1K max.
1K max.
•
•
• 8K max.
SLC
5/04
(16K)
SLC
5/04
(32K)
SLC
5/04
(64K)
SLC
5/05
(16K)
SLC
5/05
(32K)
SLC
5/05
(64K)
8K max.
• SLC 5/03 (16K)
SLC 5/04 (16K) •
SLC 5/04 (32K)
SLC 5/04 (64K)
16K max.
16K max.
16K max.
•
32K max.
16K max.
32K max.
•
SLC 5/05 (16K) •
SLC 5/05 (32K) 16K max.
16K max.
•
16K max.
32K max.
• SLC 5/05 (64K) 16K
•
valid combination max.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
max.
32K
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-24
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Selecting Isolation
Transformers
If there is high frequency conducted noise in or around your distribution equipment, use an isolation transformer in the AC line to the power supply. This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system and is often used as a “step down” transformer to reduce line voltage. Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load. This power rating is generally expressed in voltamperes (VA).
To select an appropriate isolation transformer, calculate the power required by the chassis power supply (or supplies if more than one chassis in system) and any input circuits and output loads that are connected through this transformer.
You can find the power requirement (VA rating) for the chassis power
supplies in the specifications on page 2-14. The power requirement
for the input circuits is determined by the number of inputs, the operating voltage, and the nominal input current. The power requirement for output loads is determined by the number of outputs, the load voltage, and load current.
For example, if you have a 1746-P1 power supply, 1746-IA16 16-point
AC input module (12 mA at 120V ac) and a 1746-OA16 16-point AC triac output module (0.5A at 120V ac), the power consumed would be:
135 VA + (16)(120V)(0.012A) + (16)(120V)(0.5A) = 1,118 VA
IMPORTANT
In this case, 0.5A is the maximum rating of the triac output (at 30° C). If the load draws less than 0.5A, this figure may be reduced accordingly. The output portion of the VA calculation should reflect the current requirements of selected loads.
In general, we recommend that the transformer is oversized to provide some margin for line voltage variations and other factors.
Typically a transformer that is 25% larger than the calculated VA is sufficient.
Most industrial environments are susceptible to power transients or spikes. To help insure fault-free operation and protection of equipment, use suppression devices on power line to the equipment in addition to the isolation equipment.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-25
Special Considerations
The recommendations given previously provide favorable operating conditions for most controller installations. Some applications may involve adverse conditions, such as excessive line voltage variations and/of excessive noise, as described below. Additional measures can be taken to minimize the effect of these conditions.
Class I, Division 2 Applications
IMPORTANT
When installing peripheral devices (for example, push buttons, lamps) into a hazardous environment, ensure that they are Class I, Division 2 certified, or determined to be safe for the environment.
Excessive Line Voltage Variations
The best solution for excessive line voltage variation is to correct any feeder problems in your distribution system. Where this does not solve the line variation problem, or in certain critical applications, use a constant voltage transformer. If you require a constant voltage transformer, connect it to the power supply
and
all input devices connected to the SLC 500 controller.
Connect output devices on the same power line, but their connection along the power line is normally made before the constant voltage transformer. A constant voltage transformer must have a sufficient power rating for its load.
Excessive Noise
When operating the SLC 500 controller in an environment with a high amount of electrical noise, give special consideration to the possibility of electrical interference.
The following reduces the effect of electrical interference:
•
SLC 500 controller design features
• proper mounting of controller within an enclosure
• proper equipment grounding
• proper routing of wires (power, communications, control lines)
• proper suppression added to noise generating devices
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-26
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Potential sources of noise include inductive loads, such as relays, solenoids, and motor starters when operated by “hard contacts” like push buttons or selector switches. Suppression may be necessary when such loads are connected as output devices or when connected to the same supply line that powers the controller.
Lack of surge suppression on inductive loads may contribute to processor faults and sporadic operation. RAM can be corrupted (lost) and I/O modules may appear to be faulty or reset themselves.
For extremely noisy environments, use a memory module and program it for auto-loading on processor fault or power cycle for quick recovery.
Selecting Surge Suppressors
Most output modules have built-in surge suppression to reduce the effects of high voltage transients. However, you should use an additional suppression device if an output module is being used to control an inductive device such as:
• relays
• motor starters
• solenoids
• motors
Additional suppression is especially important if your inductive device is in series with or parallel to a hard contact such as:
• push buttons
• selector switches
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-27
By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device, you reduce the effects of voltage transients caused by interrupting the current to that inductive device and prolong the life of the switch contacts. You also prevent electrical noise from radiating into system wiring. The diagram below shows an output module with a suppression device.
+ DC or L1
AC or DC
Output Module
VAC/VDC
Out 0
Out 1
Out 2
Out 3
Out 4
Out 5
Out 6
Out 7
COM
Snubber
DC COM or L2
If you connect an SLC 500 controller triac output to control an inductive load, use varistors to suppress noise. Choose a varistor that is appropriate for the application. Rockwell Automation recommends the following surge supressors for triac outputs when switching 120V ac inductive loads:
•
Harris MOV, part number V220 MA2A, or
•
Allen-Bradley MOV, Catalog Number 599-K04 or 599-KA04,
Series C or later.
Consult the varistor manufacturer’s data sheet when selecting a varistor for your application.
ATTENTION
!
Damage could occur to SLC 500 triac outputs if you use suppressors having RC networks. Allen-Bradley
AC surge suppressors
not recommended
for use with triacs include Catalog Numbers 199-FSMA1,
199-FSMA2, 1401-N10, and 700-N24.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-28
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Allen-Bradley surge suppressors recommended for use with
Allen-Bradley relays, contactors, and starters are shown in the table below.
Device
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
Bulletin 509 Motor Starter
Coil Voltage
120V ac
240V ac
Suppressor Catalog No.
599-K04
(1)
599-KA04
Bulletin 100 Conductor
Bulletin 100 Conductor
120V ac
240V ac
199-FSMA1
(2)
199-FSMA2
Bulletin 709 Motor Starter
Miscellaneous electromagnetic devices limited to 35 sealed VA
120V ac
1401-N10
Bulletin 700 Type R, RM Relays
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
AC coil
12V dc
12V dc
24V dc
24V dc
48V dc
48V dc
None Required
199-FSMA9
199-FSMA9
199-FSMA9
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
Bulletin 700 Type R Relay
Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay
115-125V dc
115-125V dc
230-250V dc
230-250V dc
199-FSM10
199-FSMA11
Bulletin 700 Type N, P, or PK Relay 150V max, AC or DC 700-N24
150V max, AC or DC 700-N24
(1) Varistor – Not recommended for use on relay outputs.
(2) RC Type – Do not use with Triac outputs.
Selecting Contact Protection
Inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids may require the use of some type of surge suppression to protect the controller output contacts. Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the lifetime of relay contacts. The figure below shows the use of surge suppression devices.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-29
Surge Suppression for Inductive AC Load Devices
Output Device
Varistor
Output Device
Output Device
Surge
Suppressor
RC Network
Surge Suppression for Inductive DC Load Devices
+
Output Device
Diode (A surge suppressor can also be used.)
Contact protection methods for inductive AC and DC output devices.
These surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device. This reduces arcing of the output contacts. (High transient can cause arcing that occurs when switching off an inductive device.)
Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor, an RC network, or an Allen-Bradley surge suppressor. These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device.
For inductive DC load devices, a diode is suitable. A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications. A surge suppressor can also be used.
Locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-30
Selecting Your Hardware Components
Transistor Output Transient Pulses
This section applies to the following SLC 500 fixed I/O processors and
SLC 500 I/O modules that have transistor outputs:
Fixed I/O processors with transistor outputs
•
1747-L20E
•
1747-L20G
•
1747-L20L
•
1747-L20N
•
1747-L30L
•
1747-L40E
•
1747-L40L
I/O modules with transistor outputs
•
1746-OB8
•
1746-OBP8
•
1746-OV8
•
1746-OB16
•
1746-OB16E
•
1746-OB16EI
•
1746-OBP16
•
1746-OV16
•
1746-OVP16
•
1746-OB32
•
1746-OB32E
•
1746-OV32
For the SLC 500 products listed above, the maximum duration of the transient pulse occurs when minimum load is connected to the output. However, for most applications the energy of the transient pulse is not sufficient to energize the load.
ATTENTION
!
A transient pulse occurs in transistor outputs when the external DC supply voltage is applied to the common output terminals (e.g., via the master control relay).
The sudden application of voltage creates this transient pulse. (See the following graph.) This condition is inherent in transistor outputs and is common to solid state devices. A transient pulse can occur regardless of the processor having power or not.
Transient Pulse
(On-State Load
Current)
Duration of Transient (T)
Time
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Selecting Your Hardware Components
2-31
To reduce the possibility of inadvertent operation of devices connected to transistor outputs, adhere to the following guidelines:
•
Either ensure that any programmable device connected to the transistor output is programmed to ignore all output signals until after the transient pulse has ended,
• or add an external resistor in parallel to the load to increase the on-state load current. The duration of the transient pulse is reduced when the on-state load current is increased.
The duration of the transient pulse is proportional to the load impedance. This is illustrated in the following graph.
5
4
3
2
1
0
10
9
8
7
6
1 100 200
300
400 500 600 700 800 900
On-State Load Current (mA)
1000
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2-32
Selecting Your Hardware Components
EXAMPLE
Increasing the load current by 100 mA decreases the transient time from approximately 7 ms to less than
2.5 ms. To calculate the size of the resistor added in parallel to increase the current, use the following information:
24V = your applied voltage
Need 100 mA of load current to reduce the transient to <2.5 ms. (taken from graph above).
R (
Ω
) = V (Volts)/I (Amps)
Resistor value (Ohms) = Applied voltage
(Volts)/Desired current (Amps) = 24/0.1 = 240 (
Ω
)
P (Watts) = 1
2
(Amps) x R (
Ω
)
Actual Power (Watts) = (Desired Current)
2
x Resistor
Value = (0.1)2 x 240 = 2.4 (Watts)
Resistor size = 2 x Actual power (Watts) = 4.8W = approximately 5W
Use a resistor rated for 240 Ohms at 5 Watts to decrease the transient time from approximately 7 ms to less than 2.5 ms.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
System Installation Recommendations
Chapter
3
To help you install the SLC 500 programmable controller as safely and securely as possible, follow the specific recommendations in this chapter. For general installation guidelines, also refer to the requirements specific to your region.
•
Europe:
Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your national regulations.
•
United States:
Refer to article 70E of the National Fire Protection
Association (NFPA). It describes electrical safety requirements for employee workplaces.
This chapter covers the following:
• typical installation
• spacing your controllers
• preventing excessive heat
• grounding guidelines
• master control relay
• power considerations
• safety considerations
• preventive maintenance
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-2
System Installation Recommendations
Typical Installation
The figure below consists of some components that make up a typical installation. The following symbols are used:
1.
NEMA-rated enclosure suitable for your application and environment that shields your controller from electrical noise and airborne contaminants.
2.
Disconnect, to remove power from the system
3.
Fused isolation transformer or a constant voltage transformer, as your application requires
4.
Master control relay/emergency-stop circuit
5.
Terminal blocks or wiring ducts
6.
Suppression devices for limiting EMI
(electromagnetic interference) generation
(1)
(4)
MCR
(6)
(5)
(2)
Disconnect
Device
(3) Isolation
Transformer
SLC 500
Controller
ATTENTION
!
Vertical mounting is not recommended due to thermal considerations.
Spacing Your Controller
The figure on the following page depicts acceptable layouts. Follow the recommended minimum spacing to allow for convection cooling within the enclosure. Air temperature in the enclosure must be kept within a range of 0°C to +60°C (32°F to +140°F).
IMPORTANT
Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for the controllers. Do not drill holes above a mounted SLC 500 controller.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
System Installation Recommendations
3-3
C
C
1746-C9 Cable
A
SLC 500
1746-C7 Cable
A
SLC 500
1746-C9
Cable
B
C
SLC 500
D
SLC 500
Recommended Spacing
A.
15.3 to 20.0 cm (6 to 8 in.) when using the 1746-C9 cable. If you mount two 13-slot chassis above each other, the distance cannot exceed 10.2 to 12.7 cm (4 to 5 in.).
B.
Greater than 10.2 cm (4 in.)
C.
Greater than 15.3 cm (6 in.)
D.
7.7 to 10.2 cm (3 to 4 in.) when using the 1746-C7 cable
B
B
B
A
SLC 500
1746-C9
Cable
B
C
SLC 500
Preventing Excessive Heat
For most applications, normal convection cooling will keep the
SLC 500 controller components within the specified operating range of
0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F). Proper spacing of components within the enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation.
In some applications, a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure. In this case, place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce “hot spots” near the SLC 500 controller.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-4
System Installation Recommendations
Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered.
IMPORTANT
Do not bring in unfiltered outside air. It may introduce harmful contaminants of dirt that could cause improper operation or damage to components.
In extreme cases, you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build-up within the enclosure.
Grounding Guidelines
In solid-state control systems, grounding helps limit the effects of electrical noise due to electromagnetic interference (EMI). The ground path for the SLC 500 controller and its enclosure is provided by the equipment grounding conductor.
Chassis
Mounting Tab
Size M4 or M5
(#10 or #12)
Internal Star
Washer
Normal Electrical Noise Conditions
Size M5 or M6
(4.826mm or 5.48 mm)
Hardware
5.2 mm
2
(10 AWG) to Ground Bus
Ground Lug
Size M5 or M6
(#10 or #12)
Internal Star
Washer
Severe Electrical Noise Conditions
Chassis Mounting Tab
Size M5 or M6
(4.826mm or 5.48 mm) Hardware
Scrape paint off panel to insure electrical connection between chassis and grounded metal panel.
Tapped Hole
(Minimum of Three
Threads)
Metal Panel
(Must be connected to earth ground.)
Scrape paint off panel to insure electrical connection between chassis and grounded metal panel.
Tapped Hole (Minimu of Three Threads)
Metal Panel
(Must be connected to earth ground.)
ATTENTION
!
The 1746 chassis, the enclosure, and other control devices must be properly grounded. All applicable codes and ordinances must be observed when wiring the SLC 500 controller system.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Safety Ground
2 mm
2
(14 AWG)
System Installation Recommendations
3-5
Ground connections should run from the chassis and power supply on each SLC 500 controller and expansion unit to the ground bus.
Exact connections will differ between applications.
Europe:
Reference EN 60204 for safety information on grounding.
Also, refer to
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and
Wiring Guidelines
, Publication Number 1770-4.1.
United States:
An authoritative source on grounding requirements for most installations is the National Electrical Code. Also, refer to
Allen-Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring
Guidelines
, Publication Number 1770-4.1.
In addition to the grounding required for the SLC 500 controller and its enclosure, you must also provide proper grounding for all controlled devices in your application. Care must be taken to provide each device with an acceptable grounding path.
This figure shows you how to run ground connections from the chassis to the ground bus. The recommended grounding method is shown below. Using a ground bus reduces the electrical resistance at the connection.
Nearest Ground Bus
Earth Ground
8.37 mm
2
(8 AWG) wire
Functional Ground
5.26 mm
2
(10 AWG)
(1)
(1)
Safety Ground
2 mm
2
(14 AWG)
(1)
Safety Ground
2 mm
2
(14 AWG)
(1) Keep safety ground connection to panel as short as possible.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-6
System Installation Recommendations
Special Grounding Considerations for DC Applications using
1746-P3
Keep wire length as short as possible.
ATTENTION
!
Any voltage applied to the 1746-P3 DC NEUT terminal will be present at the SLC logic ground and the processor DH-485 port. To prevent unwanted potentials across the logic ground of the controller and/or damage to the SLC chassis, the DC NEUTRAL of the external DC power source must be either isolated from the SLC chassis ground, or connected to earth ground. See the figure below:
1746-P3
Processor
External DC Power Source
+24 VDC
DC NEUT
Chassis
Ground
Earth Ground
Door
Not Used
Not Used
+24V dc
DC Neut
Chassis
Ground
A jumper wire is recommended between the DC NEUT and Chassis
Ground of the external power source.
DH-485
Port
Safety Ground
SLC 500 Chassis
SLC Logic Ground
Earth Ground
Modification to the SLC 500 Series A Chassis
SLC 500 chassis (1746-A4, -A7, -A10, and -A13) manufactured
before
November 1992 have a resistor between the logic ground and chassis ground. This resistor could be damaged if the wiring recommendation described within the attention box on the previous page is not followed. See the figure below for the location of the resistor. SLC 500 chassis (1746-A4, -A7, -A10, and -A13) with a manufacture date of
November 1992 or later do not have this resistor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
System Installation Recommendations
3-7
1746-P3
Processor SLC 500 Chassis
Door
Not Used
Not Used
+24V dc
DC Neut
Chassis
Ground
DH-485
Port
Resistor
SLC Logic
Ground
Chassis Ground
Safety Ground Earth Ground
Determining the Date of the SLC 500 Series A Chassis
The date of the chassis is found within the serial number imprinted on the chassis nameplate, located on the right side of the chassis. See the figure below:
Right Side
Month
Year
CAT
1746 - A7
SLC 500
RACK
SER
A
®
SERIAL NO.
A7 -1195A1357
ULL
SA
®
MADE IN U. S. A.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-8
System Installation Recommendations
Master Control Relay
A hard-wired master control relay (supplied by you) provides a convenient means for emergency controller shutdown. Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency-stop switches in different locations, its installation is important from a safety standpoint. Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens, the master control relay is de-energized. This removes power to input and output device circuits.
ATTENTION
!
Never alter these circuits to defeat their function, since serious injury and/or machine damage could occur.
IMPORTANT
If you are using a DC power supply, interrupt the DC side rather than the AC side to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn-on and turn-off. The DC power supply should receive its power directly from the fused secondary of the transformer. Connect the power to the DC input and output circuits through a set of master control relay contacts.
Place the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure, place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure, so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure.
Whenever any of the emergency-stop switches are opened, power to input and output devices is stopped.
When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I/O circuits, power continues to be provided to the controller’s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
System Installation Recommendations
3-9
The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller. It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de-energize I/O devices only. When inspecting or installing terminal connections, replacing output fuses, or working on equipment within the enclosure, use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system.
IMPORTANT
The operator must not control the master control relay with the processor. Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency-stop switch and the master control relay.
Emergency-Stop Switches
Adhere to the following points concerning emergency-stop switches:
•
Do not program emergency-stop switches in the controller program. Any emergency-stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay.
•
Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency-stop switches.
•
Install emergency-stop switches and the master control relay in your system. Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application. Emergency-stop switches must be
easy to reach. See the schematic on page 3-10.
Common Power Source Power Considerations
All chassis power supplies should have the same power source as the input and output devices. This helps reduce the chance of electrical interference due to multiple sources and grounds as well as helps maintain system integrity if power is interrupted.
The processor detects the absence of power to any chassis in the system. If power to any chassis is lost (or not yet applied), the CPU
FAULT LED turns on and all controller outputs are de-energized.
This fault detection makes it necessary that you apply power to the expansion chassis
before
you apply power to the chassis containing the processor to avoid an unwanted fault. Of course, applying power in sequence is unnecessary if all chassis have a common power source.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-10
System Installation Recommendations
Isolation Transformer
In many industrial applications, a step-down transformer is required to reduce line voltage to 120 or 240V ac. This transformer also provides isolation to protect equipment from high voltage transients that may be generated on your power distribution system.
ATTENTION
!
Your SLC 500 power supply can be damaged by voltage surges when switching inductive loads such as motors, motor starters, solenoids, and relays. To avoid damage to your SLC 500 power supply in these applications, use an isolation transformer to isolate the power supply from harmful voltage surges.
Grounded ac Power-Distribution System with Master-Control
Relay
Disc.
Suppressor
The I/O circuits form a net inductive load switched by the CRM contacts.
Therfore, a suppressor is needed across the line at the load side of the CRM contacts.
Incoming
AC
L1
L2
L3
FUSE
Multiple E-stop switches
1FU
2FU
3FU
Start
MCR
L1
Controller
Power Supply
L1
L2
L3
Step-down
Transformer
Grounded Conductor
To Motor
Starters
Back-panel
Ground Bus
Enclosure
Wall
MCR
1
Suppressor
Equipment-
Grounding
Conductors
Grounding-electrode
Conductor to
Grounding-electrode
System
GND
N or L2
Connect when applicable
MCR
Suppressor
User DC
Supply
Output
Actuator
CRM
+ –
Input
Sensor
Input Module
Wiring Arm
Output Module
Wiring Arm
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
System Installation Recommendations
3-11
Loss of Power Source
The chassis power supplies are designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system. The time the system is operational during power loss is called “program scan hold-up time after loss of power.” The duration of the power supply hold-up time depends on the number, type, and state of the I/O modules, but is typically between 20 ms and 3 seconds. When the duration of power loss reaches a limit, the power supply signals the processor that it can no longer provide adequate DC power to the system. This is referred to as a power supply shutdown. The power supply LED is turned off.
In multi-chassis systems, power outages of 20 to 300 ms in duration can cause a remote power fail error to occur. You can clear this error by cycling power to your system or by using a programming device.
Input States on Power Down
The power supply hold-up time as described above is generally longer than the turn-on and turn-off times of the input modules.
Because of this, the input state change from On to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system. Understanding this concept is important. Write the user program to take this effect into account. For example, hard-wire power to one spare input. In the user program, check to be sure that one input is on; otherwise, jump to the end of the program and avoid scanning the logic. Use of a common power source as recommended in the previous section is assumed.
Other Types of Line Conditions
Occasionally, the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted. It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time.
Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-12
System Installation Recommendations
Safety Considerations
Safety considerations are an important element of proper system installation. Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and others, as well as the condition of your equipment, is of primary importance.
Disconnecting Main Power
Locate the main power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it. Ideally, the disconnect switch is mounted on the outside of the enclosure, so that it can be accessed without opening the enclosure. In addition to disconnecting electrical power, de-energize all other sources of power
(pneumatic and hydraulic) before working on a machine or process controlled by an SLC controller.
Safety Circuits
Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons, like overtravel limit switches, stop push buttons, and interlocks, should always be hard-wired directly to the master control relay. These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens, the master control relay is de-energized thereby removing power to the machine. Never alter these circuits to defeat their function. Serious injury or machine damage could result.
Power Distribution
There are some points about power distribution that you should be aware of. First, the master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I/O devices when the relay is de-energized.
Second, if you are using a DC power supply, interrupt the load side rather than the AC line power. This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn-on and turn-off. The DC power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer. Power to the DC input and output circuits is connected through a set of master control relay contacts.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
System Installation Recommendations
3-13
Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit
Any part can fail, including the switches in a master control relay circuit. The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit, which would be a safe power-off failure. However, if one of these switches shorts out, it no longer provides any safety protection. These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed.
Preventive Maintenance
The printed circuit boards of the controller must be protected from dirt, oil, moisture and other airborne contaminants. To protect these boards, the controller must be installed in an enclosure suitable for the environment. The interior of the enclosure should be kept clean and the enclosure door should be kept closed whenever possible.
Regularly inspect your terminal connections for tightness. Loose connections may cause improper functioning of the controller or damage the components of the system.
ATTENTION
!
To ensure personal safety and to guard against damaging equipment, inspect connections with incoming power off.
The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) provides recommendations for electrical equipment maintenance. Refer to article 70B of the NFPA for general requirements regarding safety related work practices.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
3-14
System Installation Recommendations
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
4
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
1
This chapter provides mounting dimensions for:
•
4, 7, 10, and 13-slot chassis
• link coupler (AIC)
•
Data Terminal Access Module (DTAM)
•
DTAM Plus Operator Interface
•
DTAM Micro Operator Interface
•
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
Mounting Modular
Hardware Style Units
(3) (2) (1)
11 Dia.
(0.433)
You can mount the modular hardware style units directly to the back panel of your enclosure using the mounting tabs and #10 or #12 screws. The torque requirement is 3.4 N-m (30 in-lbs) maximum.
4-Slot Modular Chassis
1.0
(0.04)
70
(2.76)
5.5 Dia.
(0.217)
158
(6.22)
140
(5.51)
171
(6.73)
171
(6.73) 140
(5.51)
14
(0.55)
45
(1.77)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
145
(5.71)
215
(8.46)
235
(9.25) millimeters
(inches)
261
(10.28)
Front View Left Side View
(1) Dimensions for 1746-P1 power supply.
(2) Dimensions for 1746-P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 power supplies.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
4-2
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
7-Slot Modular Chassis
. Dia.
(0.217)
175
(6.89)
1.0
(0.04)
158
(6.22)
(3) (2) (1)
11 Dia.
(0.433)
140
(5.51)
171
140
(5.51)
(6.73)
171
(6.73)
158
(6.22)
(3) (2) (1)
11 Dia.
(0.433)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
Front View
366
(14.41)
320
(12.60)
340
(13.39)
45
(1.77)
14
(0.55) millimeters (inches)
10-Slot Modular Chassis
Left Side View
145
(5.71)
1.0
(0.04)
5.5 Dia.
(0.217)
140
(5.51)
55
(2.17)
140
(5.51)
171
(6.73)
140
(5.51)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
14
(0.55)
140
(5.51)
455
(17.91)
435
(17.13)
481
(18.94)
Front View millimeters (inches)
(1) Dimensions for 1746-P1 power supply.
(2) Dimensions for 1746-P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 power supplies.
(3) Dimensions for 1746-P4 power supply.
145
(5.71)
Left Side View
158
(6.22)
(3) (2) (1)
11 Dia.
(0.433)
5.5 Dia.
(0.217)
13-Slot Modular Chassis
105
(4.13)
140
(5.51)
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
4-3
55
(2.17)
140
(5.51)
171
(6.73)
14
(0.55)
5.5 Dia
(0.217)
140
(5.51)
540
(21.26)
586
(23.07)
560
(22.05)
Front View
1.0
(0.04) millimeters
(inches)
171
(6.73)
140
(5.51)
(1) Dimensions for 1746-P1 power supply.
(2) Dimensions for 1746-P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 power supplies.
(3) Dimensions for 1746-P4 power supply.
145
(5.71)
Left Side View
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
4-4
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
Link Coupler (AIC)
R 2.74
(0.11)
R 5.5
(0.22)
146
(5.75)
159
(6.24)
137
(5.41)
7.1
(0.28)
38
(1.50)
Front View
14
(0.55)
5.5 Dia.
(0.216) millimeters
(inches)
Right Side View
4.3
(0.17)
172
(6.75)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
4-5
Data Table Access Module (DTAM, DTAM Plus, and DTAM Micro)
C
A D
B
Front View Right Side View
Data Table Access Module Dimensions in millimeters (inches)
DTAM
A
152 (6.0)
B
140 (5.5)
C
69 (2.76)
DTAM Plus
DTAM Micro
215.9 (8.5) 165.1 (6.5) 45.7 (1.8)
137.2 (5.4
175.3 (6.9) 45.7 (1.8)
D
127 (5.0)
193 (7.6)
99.1 (3.9)
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
4-6
Mounting Your SLC 500 Control System
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter (1761-NET-AIC)
DeviceNet Interface (1761-NET-DNI)
Ethernet Interface (1761-NET-ENI)
52.07 mm
(2.05 in.)
118 mm
(4.64 in.)
107 mm
(4.20 in.)
6.6 mm
(0.26 in.)
27.7 mm
(1.09 in.)
Allow 15 mm (0.6 in.) clearance for DIN rail latch movement during installation and removal.
71.4 mm
(2.81 in.)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
5
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/01 Processor
Hardware Features
This chapter covers the following:
•
SLC 5/01 hardware features
•
SLC 5/02 hardware features
•
SLC 5/03 hardware features
•
SLC 5/04 hardware features
•
SLC 5/05 hardware features
• keyswitch for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
The SLC 5/01 processor provides:
• two choices of program memory size - 1K or 4K instructions
• control of up to 3840 input and output points
• powerful ladder logic programming instruction set
• subroutines
• a DH-485 communication channel (peer-to-peer communication response to message commands only)
• capacitor backup for the -L511; battery backup for the -L514
• program using the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) or programming software
•
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant
The figure on page 5-2 shows the hardware components of the SLC
5/01 processor (1747-L511 and 1747-L514).
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-2
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
Memory
Module and
Socket
SLC 5/01 CPU
PC RUN
CPU FAULT
FORCED I/O
BATTERY LOW
Left Side View
Battery
(provides back-up power for the
CMOS RAM)
Serial Number and Catalog Number
DH-485
Channel 1
Front View
The table below provides a general explanation of the SLC 5/01 processor LEDs.
Processor
LED
(1)
PC RUN
(Color: red)
CPU FAULT
(Color: red)
FORCED I/O
(Color: red)
BATTERY LOW
(Color: red)
When It Is Indicates that
On (steady) The processor is in the Run mode.
Off The processor is in a mode other than Run.
Flashing (at power up) The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during operation)
The processor detects a major error either in the processor, chassis or memory.
On (steady)
Off
Flashing
A fatal error is present (no communication).
There are no errors.
One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled.
The forces have been enabled.
On (steady)
Off
On (steady)
Off
No forces are present or enabled.
The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level or the battery and the battery jumper are missing.
The battery is functional, or the battery jumper is present.
(1) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
SLC 5/02 Processor
Hardware Features
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-3
The SLC 5/02 processor offers an enhanced instruction set, increased diagnostic capabilities, and expanded communication capabilities beyond the SLC 5/01 processors and fixed controllers. The SLC 5/02 provides:
• program memory size of 4K instructions
• control of up to 4096 input and output points
•
PID - used to provide closed loop process control
• indexed addressing
• interrupt capability
• user fault routines
• ability to handle 32-bit signed math functions
• built-in DH-485 communication channel (initiation of peer-to-peer communication)
• battery-backed RAM
• communication LED; when on, the LED indicates that there is communication activity on the DH-485 network
• program using the Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) or programming software
•
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-4
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC
5/02 processor (1747-L524 Series B and Series C).
1747-L524 Series B
Left Side View
Memory Module and Socket
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Battery (provides back-up power for the CMOS RAM)
1747-L524 Series C
SLC 5/02 CPU
RUN COMM
CPU FAULT
FORCED I/O
BATTERY LOW
DH-485
Channel 1
Left Side View
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-5
The table below provides a general explanation of each processor status LED (for both the SLC 5/02 Series B and C).
Processor
LED
(1)
RUN
(Color: red)
CPU FAULT
(Color: red)
FORCED I/O
(Color: red)
BATTERY LOW
(Color: red)
When It Is
On (steady)
Off
Flashing (at power up)
Flashing (during operation)
On (steady)
Off
Flashing
On (steady)
Off
On (steady)
Indicates that
The processor is in the Run mode.
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
The processor has not been configured.
The processor detects a major error either in the processor, expansion chassis or memory.
A fatal error is present (no communication).
There are no errors.
One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled.
The forces have been enabled.
No forces are present or enabled.
The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level or the battery is missing or not connected.
COMM
(Color: red)
On (steady)
Off
The SLC 5/02 is connected to an active DH485 network.
The SLC 5/02 is not receiving data.
(1) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-6
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/03 Processor
Hardware Features
The SLC 5/03 processor offers the following:
• program memory size of 8K or 16K
• control of up to 4096 input and output points
• online programming (includes runtime editing)
• built-in DH-485 channel
• built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
–
DF1 Full-Duplex for point-to-point communication; remotely via a modem, or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices. (Use a 1747-CP3 cable for direct connection.)
–
DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type
(point-to-multipoint) communication
–
DH-485 (Serves as a second DH-485 channel. Use a
1761-NET-AIC with a 1747-CP3, 1761-CBL-AC00, or
1761-CBL-AP00 cable to connect to the DH-485 network.)
–
ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales
• remote I/O passthru
•
DeviceNet passthru
• built-in real-time clock/calendar
•
2 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
•
0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
• advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential, floating-point, and the compute instruction
• indirect addressing
• flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS
• optional flash EPROM memory module available
• keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
• battery-backed RAM
• additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
(SLC 5/03 OS302 processor or higher)
• multi-point list (SLC 5/03 OS302 processor or higher)
•
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-7
The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC
5/03 processors (1747-L531 and 1747-L532).
SLC 5/03 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH485
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Battery
(provides back-up power for the CMOS
RAM)
Memory
Module
Keyswitch
DH-485
Channel 1
DH-485, DF1, or ASCII
Channel 0
Operating System Memory
Module Download
Protection Jumper
Left Side View
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Front View
The table below provides a general explanation of each processor status LED on the SLC 5/03 processor.
Processor
LED
(1)(2)
RUN
(Color: green)
FLT
(Color: red)
When It Is
On (steady)
Flashing (during operation)
Off
Flashing (at power up)
Flashing (during operation)
On (steady)
Off
Indicates that
The processor is in the Run mode.
The processor is transferring a program from RAM to the memory module.
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
The processor has not been configured.
The processor detects a major error either in the processor, chassis or memory.
A fatal error is present (no communications).
There are no errors.
BATT
(Color: red)
On (steady) The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level, or the battery is missing or not connected.
The battery is functional.
Off
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-8
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
Processor
LED
(1)(2)
FORCE
(Color: amber)
DH-485
(Color: green)
When It Is
Flashing
On (steady)
Off
On (steady)
Flashing
Indicates that
One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled.
The forces have been enabled.
No forces are present or enabled.
The Communications Active Bit (S:1/7) is set in the
System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the DH-485 network.
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes on the DH-485 network.
A fatal error is present (no communications).
The SLC 5/03 is transmitting on the network.
RS-232
(Color: green)
Off
On (flashing)
DF1/ASCII
Mode
Off
DF1/ASCII
Mode
On (steady)
DH-485 Mode
The SLC 5/03 processor is not transmitting on the network.
Flashing
DH-485 Mode
The Communications Active Bit (S:33/4) is set in the
System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the DH-485 network.
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes on the DH-485 network.
A fatal error is present (no communications).
Off
DH-485 Mode
(1) If the LEDs on the SLC 5/03 turn on in a predefined sequence, the SLC 5/03 is in the process of downloading a new operating system.
(2) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
SLC 5/04 Processor
Hardware Features
The SLC 5/04 processors offer the following:
• program memory sizes of 16K, 32K, or 64K
• high-speed performance - 0.90 ms/K typical
• control of up to 4096 input and output points
• online programming (includes runtime editing)
• built-in DH
+
channel, supporting:
–
high-speed communication (57.6K, 115.2K, and 230.4K baud)
–
messaging capabilities with SLC 500, PLC-2
®
, PLC-5
®
, and
ControlLogix processors
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-9
• built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
–
DF1 Full-Duplex for point-to-point communication; remotely via a modem, or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices. (Use a 1747-CP3, 1761-CBL-AC00, or 1761-CBL-AC00 cable for direct connection.)
–
DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type
(point-to-multipoint) communication
–
DH-485 (Use a 1761-NET-AIC with a 1747-CP3 cable to connect to the DH-485 network.)
–
ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales
• channel-to-channel (DH+ to DH-485) passthru capability to operator interface devices
• channel-to-channel (DF1 Full-Duplex to DH+) passthru
• remote I/O passthru
•
DeviceNet passthru
• built-in real-time clock/calendar
•
1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
•
0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
• advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential, floating point, and the compute instruction
• indirect addressing
• flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS
• optional flash EPROM memory module available
• keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
• battery-backed RAM
• additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
• multi-point list
•
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-10
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
This figure below shows some of the hardware components of the
SLC 5/04 processors (1747-L541, 1747-L542, or 1747-L543).
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH+
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Battery
(provides back-up power for the
CMOS RAM)
Memory
Module
Keyswitch
DH+
Channel 1
DH-485, DF1, or ASCII
Channel 0
Operating System Memory
Module Download
Protection Jumper
Left Side View
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Front View
The table below provides a general explanation of each processor status LED on the SLC 5/04 processors.
Processor
LED
(1)(2)
RUN
(Color: green)
FLT
(Color: red)
BATT
(Color: red)
When It Is
On (steady)
Flashing (during operation)
Indicates that
Off The processor is in a mode other than Run.
Flashing (at power up) The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during operation)
The processor detects a major error either in the processor, chassis, or memory.
On (steady)
Off
On (steady)
Off
The processor is in the Run mode.
The processor is transferring a program from
RAM to the memory module.
A fatal error is present (no communications).
There are no errors.
The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level, or the battery is missing or not connected.
The battery is functional.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-11
Processor
LED
(1)(2)
FORCE
(Color: amber)
DH
+
(Color: green or red)
RS-232
(Color: green)
When It Is
Flashing
On (steady)
Off
On (steady)
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
On (steady)
DF1/ASCII Mode
Off
DF1/ASCII Mode
On (steady)
DH-485 Mode
Flashing
DH-485 Mode
Indicates that
One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled.
The forces have been enabled.
No forces are present or enabled.
The Communications Active Bit (S:1/7) is set in the System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the DH+ network.
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes on the DH+ network.
There are duplicate nodes on the link with the same node address.
The SLC 5/04 processor is transmitting on the network.
The SLC 5/04 processor is not transmitting on the network.
The Communications Active Bit (S:33/4) is set in the System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the DH-485 network.
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes on the DH-485 network.
A fatal error is present (no communications).
Off
DH-485 Mode
(1) If the LEDs on the SLC 5/04 turn on in a predefined sequence, the SLC 5/04 is in the process of downloading a new operating system.
(2) See Chapter 10 for more information on LED status.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-12
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
SLC 5/05 Processor
Hardware Features
The SLC 5/05 processors offer the following:
• program memory sizes of 16K, 32K, or 64K
• high-speed performance - 0.90 ms/K typical
• control of up to 4096 input and output points
• online programming (includes runtime editing)
• built-in 10Base-T Ethernet channel, supporting:
–
high-speed computer communication using TCP/IP
–
messaging capabilities with SLC 5/05, PLC-5, and
ControlLogix processors on Ethernet
–
SNMP for standard Ethernet network management
–
BOOTP for optional dynamic IP address assignment
• built-in RS-232 channel, supporting:
–
DF1 Full-Duplex for point-to-point communication; remotely via a modem, or direct connection to programming or operator interface devices. (Use a 1747-CP3, 1761-CBL-AC00, or 1761-CBL-AP00 cable for direct connection.)
–
DF1 Half-Duplex Master/Slave for SCADA type
(point-to-multipoint) communication
–
DH-485 (Use a 1761-NET-AIC with a 1747-CP3 cable to connect to the DH-485 network.)
–
ASCII I/O for connection to other ASCII devices, such as bar code readers, serial printers, and weigh scales
• remote I/O passthru
• built-in real-time clock/calendar
•
1 ms Selectable Timed Interrupt (STI)
•
0.50 ms Discrete Input Interrupt (DII)
• advanced math features - trigonometric, PID, exponential, floating point, and the compute instruction
• indirect addressing
• logical ASCII addressing in PLC-5 type messages
• flash PROM provides firmware upgrades without physically changing EPROMS through the Ethernet port
• optional flash EPROM memory module available
• keyswitch - RUN, REMote, PROGram (clear faults)
• battery-backed RAM
• additional instructions such as swap and scale with parameters
• multi-point list
•
UL listed, CSA approved, CE compliant
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-13
The figure below shows some of the hardware components of the SLC
5/05 processors (1747-L551, 1747-L552, and 1747-L553).
SLC 5/05 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
ENET
RS232
RUN REM PROG
Battery
(provides back-up power for the
CMOS RAM)
Ethernet
Hardware
Address
Memory
Module
Operating System
Memory Module
Download
Protection Jumper xx:xx:xx
Left Side View
Keyswitch
Serial Number and
Catalog Number
Write-on area for IP Address
Front View
Channel 1
Ethernet
(10Base-T)
Channel 0
RS 232
(DH-485,
DF1, or
ASCII)
The table below provides a general explanation of the processor status LEDs.
When It Is Indicates that Processor
LED
RUN
(Color: green)
FLT
(Color: red)
On (steady)
Flashing (during operation)
Off
The processor is in the Run mode.
The processor is transferring a program from
RAM to the memory module.
The processor is in a mode other than Run.
Flashing (at power up) The processor has not been configured.
Flashing (during operation)
The processor detects a major error either in the processor, chassis, or memory.
On (steady)
Off
A fatal error is present (no communications).
There are no errors.
BATT
(Color: red)
On (steady) The battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level, or the battery is missing or not connected.
Off The battery is functional.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-14
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
Processor
LED
FORCE
(Color: amber)
When It Is
Flashing
On (steady)
Off
Solid Green ENET
Channel 1
(Color:
green or red)
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
RS-232
Channel 0
(Color: green)
Off
On (steady)
DF1/ASCII Mode
Off
DF1/ASCII Mode
On (steady)
DH-485 Mode
Flashing
DH-485 Mode
Off
DH-485 Mode
Indicates that
One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off state but the forces have not been enabled.
The forces have been enabled.
No forces are present or enabled.
The Ethernet port is functioning properly and is connected to an active Ethernet network.
The Ethernet port is functioning properly, connected to an active Ethernet network, and is transmitting packets.
A hardware or software fault has occurred and is being reported via a code. Contact
Allen-Bradley Global Technical Services for assistance.
No Ethernet connection or processor halted.
The SLC 5/05 processor is transmitting on the network.
The SLC 5/05 processor is not transmitting on the network.
The Channel 0 Communications Active Bit
(S:33/4) is set in the System Status file and the processor is actively communicating on the network.
The processor is trying to establish communications, but there are no other active nodes on the DH-485 network.
A fatal error is present (no communications).
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
5-15
Keyswitch for the
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 Processors
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors include a 3-position keyswitch on the front panel that lets you select one of three modes of operation: RUN, PROGram, and REMote. You can remove the key in each of the three positions.
ATTENTION
!
Depending on the size of your user program, the processor can take up to 2.5 seconds to change modes when you change the position of the keyswitch from RUN to PROG or to REM. Do not use the keyswitch in place of a hardwired master control relay or an emergency-stop switch.
IMPORTANT
The SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors do not have a keyswitch. Therefore, all modes must be changed via the communication channels.
RUN Position
This position places the processor in the Run mode. The processor scans/executes the ladder program, monitors input devices, energizes output devices, and acts on enabled I/O forces. You can only change the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position. You cannot perform online program editing.
To change the processor mode to Run, toggle the keyswitch from
PROG or REM to RUN. When the keyswitch is left in the RUN position, you cannot use a programmer/operator interface device to change the processor mode.
PROG Position
This position places the processor in the Program mode. The processor does
not
scan/execute the ladder program, and the controller outputs are de-energized. You can perform online program editing. You can only change the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position.
To change the processor mode to Program, toggle the keyswitch from
REM or RUN to PROG. When the keyswitch is left in the PROG position, you cannot use a programmer/operator interface device to change the processor mode.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
5-16
Identifying the Components of Your Processor
REM Position
This position places the processor in the Remote mode: either the
REMote Run, REMote Program, or REMote Test mode. You can change the processor mode by changing the keyswitch position or by changing the mode from a programmer/operator interface device. You can perform online program editing in this position.
To change the processor mode to REM, toggle the keyswitch from
RUN or PROG to REM.
When the keyswitch is in the REM position, you can use a programmer/operator interface device to change the processor mode.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Installing Your Hardware Components
Chapter
6
This chapter shows you how to install the following hardware components:
• your processor
• modules
• your memory module
• your power supply
• your chassis interconnect cable
Compliance to European
Union Directives
This product is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions. It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.
EMC Directive
The analog modules are tested to meet Council Directive 89/336/EEC
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and the following standards, in whole or in part, documented in a technical construction file:
•
EN 50081-2
EMC – Generic Emission Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
•
EN 50082-2
EMC – Generic Immunity Standard, Part 2 - Industrial
Environment
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6-2
Installing Your Hardware Components
Low Voltage Directive
This product is tested to meet Council Directive 73/23/EEC Low
Voltage, by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131-2
Programmable Controllers, Part 2 – Equipment Requirements and
Tests.
For specific information required by EN61131-2, see the appropriate sections in this publication, as well as the following Allen-Bradley publications:
•
Industrial Automation, Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for
Noise Immunity
, publication 1770-4.1
•
Automation Systems Catalog
, publication B113
Installing Your Processor
The processor always occupies the first slot of the first chassis. You can only install one processor per system.
ATTENTION
!
Never install, remove, or wire any module while power is applied. Also, do not expose processor modules to surfaces or other areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge.
IMPORTANT
If your processor has a battery — the battery is an option for the SLC 5/01 (1747-L511) processor — make sure it is connected before installing your processor into the chassis. This provides memory backup for your processor should the controller power supply fail.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Installing Modules
Installing Your Hardware Components
6-3
Follow the steps below to install your modules.
1.
Align the circuit board of the module with the card guide in the chassis.
Retainer Clip
Side View
Retainer Clip
2.
Gently slide the module in until both top and bottom retainer clips are secured.
3.
Install a wire tie to secure your wiring and keep it neat. (If you feed the tie into one hole, it will be routed back out through the other.)
4.
Cover any unused slots with card slot fillers (Catalog Number
1746-N2) to keep the chassis free from debris and dust.
5.
To remove the module, press the retaining clips at the top and bottom of the module and slide the module out.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6-4
Installing Your Hardware Components
Installing Your Memory
Module
Side View of SLC Processor
1747-L511, -L514, and -L524 Series B
Always turn off power to the controller before removing the processor or inserting or removing the memory module. This guards against possible damage to the module and also undesired processor faults.
Memory modules are mounted in carriers or have connectors that are
“keyed” to guard against improper installation.
ATTENTION
!
To avoid potential damage to the memory modules, handle them by the ends of the carrier or edges of the plastic housing. Skin oil and dirt can corrode metallic surfaces, inhibiting electrical contact. Also, do not expose memory modules to surfaces or areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge.
Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory.
1.
If the processor module is installed in the chassis, remove the module by pressing the retainer clips at both the top and bottom of the module and sliding it out.
2.
Locate the socket (or connector if you have an SLC 5/03, SLC
5/04, or SLC 5/05) on the processor board. Then place the memory module into the socket or onto the connector and press firmly in place.
Side View of SLC Processor
1747-L524 Series C
Side View of SLC Processor
1747-L531, -L532, -L541, -L542, -L543,
-L551, -L552, and -L553
Memory
Module
Socket
Jumper J1
(Note: Jumper J1 not on 1747-L511.)
Memory
Module
Socket
Jumper J1
Memory
Module
Connector
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Installing Your Hardware Components
6-5
Processor Type
1747-L514, -L524
Series B and Series C
1747-M1, -M2, -M3
3.
Place jumper J1 as shown below.
1747-M4 Invalid Settings
1747-L511, -L531, -L532,
-L541, -L542, -L543,
-L551, -L552, and -L553
No Jumper J1 No Jumper J1 No Jumper J1
4.
Install the processor module into the chassis.
5.
Restore power to the controller.
Removing the Memory Module
To remove a memory module, use the following procedure:
1.
Remove power and pull out the processor.
2.
Grasp the carrier tabs (or connector for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05) with your thumb and index fingers, then gently but firmly lift upwards on either end of the memory module carrier.
3.
When the end is partially raised, begin lifting the other end in the same manner. Repeat this until the memory module has been completely removed from the socket.
Installing Your Power
Supply
If you have multiple chassis configurations, install the chassis interconnect cable before installing the power supply.
(See page 6-7.) Also, the power supply terminals accept two 2mm
2
(#14 AWG) wires and are marked as shown in the figure on page 6-7.
To install the power supply, do the following:
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6-6
Installing Your Hardware Components
1.
Align the circuit board with the card guide on the left side of the chassis. Slide the power supply in until it is flush with the chassis.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1.2 Nm (11 in-lbs.) max. torque
2.
Fasten the power supply to the chassis with the two Phillips head screws.
3.
Place the jumper to match the input voltage. (This does not apply to 1746-P3, -P5, -P6, or -P7, which do not have a jumper.)
ATTENTION
!
Make jumper selection before applying power.
Hazardous voltage is present on exposed pins when power is applied.
Installing Your Hardware Components
6-7
POWER
Fuse
Jumper
Selection
100/120 Volts
200/240 Volts
1746-P1 and P2
User
Power
Fuse
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
120/240V ac
V ac NEUT
Chassis Ground
1746-P3
POWER
Not Used
Not Used
+24V dc
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
Jumper
Selection
85 to 132V ac
170 to 265V ac
1746-P4
POWER
User
Power
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
85 to 132V ac
Jumper
170 to 265V ac
L1: 85 to 132
/170 to 265V ac
L2: NEUT
Chassis Ground
POWER
User
Power
1746-P5
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
+125V dc
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
User
Power
1746-P5, -P6, and -P7
1746-P6
PWR OUT +24V dc
PWR OUT COM
+48V dc
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
User
Power
1746-P7
Not Used
Not Used
+12/24V dc
V dc NEUT
Chassis Ground
IMPORTANT
Terminal screws on the 1746-P1, -P2, -P3, -P5, -P6, and -P7 should be tightened with a maximum torque of 1 Nm (8.8 in-lbs.).
Terminal screws on the 1746-P4 should be tightened with a max torque of 0.8 Nm (7 in-lbs.).
4.
Remove the warning label from the top of the power supply.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6-8
Installing Your Hardware Components
5.
Connect line power to the power supply.
ATTENTION
!
If you have a 1746-P3, see page 3-6 for special
grounding considerations.
On the 1746-P1, -P2, -P4, -P5, and -P6 power supplies, use the PWR
OUT + 24 VDC and PWR OUT COM terminals to power sensors. The terminals provide an isolated, nonfused, 200 mA, (1000mA for 1747-P4 only), 24V dc power supply.
Installing Your Chassis
Interconnect Cable
Three cables are available to link modular hardware chassis. Catalog
Number 1746-C7 cable is 152.4 mm (6 in.) in length and is used when connecting chassis side-by-side. Catalog Number 1746-C9 is
914.4 mm (36 in.) in length and 1746-C16 is 1.27M (50 in.) in length and are used to link one chassis below the other.
ATTENTION
!
Do not use any cables other than those provided.
Longer cables could affect the integrity of data communications between the chassis, possibly causing unsafe operation. Also, make sure the cable is properly secured to protect against the effects of shock and vibration.
In multiple chassis configurations, install the chassis interconnect cable before installing the power supply.
The cables are “keyed” for proper installation. The end of the cable that plugs into the right socket in the chassis has the “key” on the top of the connector. The opposite end of the cable has the “key” on the inside of the connector for insertion into the expansion chassis.
To remove the cable, move the tabs on the socket outward and the connector pops out.
ATTENTION
!
The expansion cable must always exit the right end of the chassis with the processor and connect to the left end of the next I/O chassis. Refer to the figures
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Installing Your Hardware Components
6-9
Chassis 1
P
S
C
P
U
P
S
Chassis 2
Correct Installation
P
S
C
P
U
P
S
Incorrect Installation
P
S
C
P
U
P
S
Incorrect Installation
P
S
C
P
U
P
S
Incorrect Installation
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6-10
Installing Your Hardware Components
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
7
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Defining Sinking and
Sourcing
This chapter describes how to wire your I/O modules. It covers the following:
• defining sinking and sourcing
• preparing your wiring layout
• features of an I/O module
• recommendations for wiring I/O devices
• wiring your I/O modules
• octal label kit installation
• using removable terminal blocks
Sinking and sourcing are terms used to describe a current signal flow relationship between field input and output devices in a control system and their power supply.
•
Field devices connected to the positive side (+V) of the field power supply are sourcing field devices.
•
Field devices connected to the negative side (DC Common) of the field power supply are called sinking field devices.
To maintain electrical compatibility between field devices and the programmable controller system, this definition is extended to the input/output circuits on the discrete I/O modules.
•
Sourcing I/O circuits supply (source) current to sinking field devices.
•
Sinking I/O circuits receive (sink) current from sourcing field devices.
Europe:
DC sinking input and sourcing output module circuits are the commonly used options.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
7-2
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Contact Output Circuits — AC or DC
Relays can be used for either AC or DC output circuits and accommodate either sinking or sourcing field devices. These capabilities are a result of the output switch being a mechanical contact closure, not sensitive to current flow direction and capable of accommodating a broad range of voltages.
This high degree of application flexibility makes contact output modules very popular and useful in control environments with a broad mix of electrical I/O circuit requirements.
Solid-State DC I/O Circuits
The design of DC field devices typically requires that they be used in a specific sinking or sourcing circuit depending on the internal circuitry of the device. DC input and output field circuits are commonly used with field devices that have some form of internal solid state circuitry that need a DC signal voltage to function.
Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module Circuit
The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated, it sources current to the input circuit.
Field Device
I
Input
+
DC Power
Supply
_
DC
Input
Circuit
DC Com
Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit
The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between the supply and the input terminal. When the field device is activated, it sinks current from the input circuit.
Field Device
Input
I
_
DC Power
Supply
+
DC
Input
Circuit
VDC
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-3
Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit
The field device is on the negative side of the power supply between the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it sources current to the field device.
+
DC Power Supply
_
Field Device
I
VDC
Out
DC
Output
Circuit
DC Com
Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit
The field device is on the positive side of the power supply between the supply and the output terminal. When the output is activated, it sinks current from the field device.
+
DC Power Supply
_
Field Device
VDC
I
Out
DC
Output
Circuit
DC Com
Preparing Your Wiring
Layout
Careful wire routing within the enclosure helps to cut down electrical noise between I/O lines. Follow these rules for routing your wires:
•
Route incoming power to the controller by a separate path from wiring to I/O devices. Where paths must cross, their intersection should be perpendicular.
IMPORTANT
Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit.
•
If wiring ducts are used, allow for at least two inches between
I/O wiring ducts and the controller. If the terminal strips are used for I/O wiring, allow for at least two inches between the terminal strips and the controller.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
7-4
Wiring Your I/O Modules
•
Limit the cable length for the TTL input module to 15.24 m
(50 ft.) per point and 3.05 m (10 ft.) per point for the TTL output module. Use low power DC I/O wiring even though it is less tolerant to electrical noise.
ATTENTION
!
Handle the TTL module by its ends, not metallic surfaces. Electrostatic discharges can damage the module. Do not expose the TTL module to electrostatic charges.
•
Segregate I/O wiring by signal type. Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together.
Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed into the enclosure by separate paths. Refer to
Allen-Bradley Programmable
Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines
, Publication Number
1770-4.1.
ATTENTION
!
If the controller is being installed within a potentially hazardous environment (that is, Class I, Division 2), all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501-4 (b).
Recommendations for
Wiring I/O Devices
The following are general recommendations for wiring I/O devices.
ATTENTION
!
Before you install and wire I/O devices, disconnect power from the controller and any other source to the I/O devices.
Use acceptable wire gauge — The I/O wiring terminals are designed to accept two wires per terminal (maximum) of the following size wire:
•
Europe:
2mm
2
cross section or smaller
•
United States:
14 AWG or smaller stranded wires
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-5
See diagram on page 7-6 for maximum torque values for wiring
terminal screws and terminal block screws.
Label wires - Label wiring to I/O devices, power sources, and ground.
Use tape, shrink-tubing, or other dependable means for labeling purposes. In addition to labeling, use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics. For example, you may use blue for DC I/O wiring and red for AC I/O wiring.
Secure wires - Route the wires down and away from the module, securing them with the cable tie.
Bundle wires - Bundle wiring for each similar I/O device together. If you use ducts, allow at least 5 cm (2 in.) between the ducts and the controller so there is sufficient room to wire the devices.
Identify terminals - Terminal cover plates have a write-on area for each terminal. Use this area to identify your I/O devices. Label the removable terminal block if you have not already.
ATTENTION
!
Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common wire. Observe all local electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size. Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat, which can cause damage.
Capacitors on input modules have a stored charge that can cause a non-lethal shock. Avoid mounting the controller in a position where installation or service personnel would be in danger from startle reaction.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
7-6
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Features of an I/O Module
Below is an example of a combination I/O module.
Color Band
OUTPUT INPUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
I/O Status
Indicators
Terminal Block Screw maximum torque: 0.6 Nm (5.3 in-lbs)
Input and Output Terminals
Connected to Terminal Block
Hinged Wiring Terminal
Door with Label
Terminal Block (may be color-coded and removable on some modules)
Terminal Wiring
•
2 wires per terminal maximum
•
#14 AWG (2mm2) maximum
• maximum torque: 0.9 Nm (8 in-lbs)
Terminal Block Screw maximum torque: 0.6 Nm (5.3 in-lbs)
Wires Leading to Input and Output Devices
Tie Wire
Wiring Your I/O Module
Terminals on the modules have self-lifting pressure plates that accept two 2 mm
2
(14 AWG) wires. Series B 12-point and 16-point and analog modules are equipped with removable terminal blocks for ease of wiring. The plug for the removable terminals is also color coded: red (AC), blue (DC), orange (relay), or green (specialty).
LED indicators on the front of each module display the status of each
I/O point. The LED indicators illuminate when the proper signal to an input terminal is applied or when the processor commands an output to be energized.
To locate the I/O module wiring diagrams, contact your Rockwell
Automation sales office for the latest product data entitled
Discrete
Input and Output Modules,
Publication Number 1746-2.35. Or, locate the installation instruction sheet that was sent with your I/O module.
It also includes I/O wiring diagrams.
1.
Install a tie wire to secure your wiring and keep it neat. (If you feed the tie into one hole, it is routed back out through the other.)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-7
2.
Cover any unused slots with card slot fillers (Catalog Number
1746-N2) to keep the chassis free from debris and dust.
Octal Label Kit Installation
The octal label kit consists of an octal filter label and a door label. Use these octal labels to replace the decimal labels that are attached to the
I/O modules. An octal label kit is included with the I/O modules listed in the table on the following page. The kits can also be obtained through your Allen-Bradley distributor. (The octal label kit is applicable when using 1746 I/O with Allen-Bradley PLC-5 processors via a 1747-ASB Remote I/O Adapter.)
Applying the Octal Filter Label
1.
Remove the octal filter label from its paper carrier.
2.
Align the octal filter label numbers horizontally to the module color bar and over the decimal filter numbers, as shown in the illustration below.
3.
Apply the octal label to the filter.
4.
Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.
Applying the Octal Door Label
1.
Remove the octal door label from its paper carrier.
2.
Align it over the decimal door label on the inside of the door.
3.
Press firmly to ensure proper adhesion of the label.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
7-8
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Module Color Bar
Decimal Filter Label
Octal Filter Label
Octal Door Label
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Decimal Door Label
Octal Kit and I/O Module Information
I/O Module
Catalog Number
(1)
1746-IA16
1746-IB16
1746-IG16
1746-IM16
1746-IN16
1746-IV16
1746-ITB16
1746-ITV16
1746-OA16
1746-OB16
1746-OG16
1746-OV16
1746-OW16
1746-OBP16
1746-OVP16
Octal Kit
Catalog Number
1746-RL40
1746-RL41
1746-RL42
1746-RL43
1746-RL44
1746-RL45
1746-RL46
1746-RL47
1746-RL50
1746-RL51
1746-RL52
1746-RL53
1746-RL54
1746-RL55
1746-RL56
Using the Removable
Terminal Block (RTB)
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-9
I/O Module
Catalog Number
(1)
1746-OAP12
1746-IC16
1746-IH16
1746-IB32
1746-IV32
Octal Kit
Catalog Number
1746-RL57
1746-RL58
1746-RL59
1746-RL60
1746-RL61
1746-OB32 and -OB32E 1746-RL70
1746-OV32 1746-RL71
1746-OB16E 1746-RL72
(1) Kit available with series C I/O modules.
The Removable Terminal Block (RTB) is provided on all 12-point and
16-point discrete I/O modules and analog modules. They allow for faster and more convenient wiring of the I/O modules. The modules and the RTB are color-coded as follows:
Color
Red
Blue
Orange
Green
Type of I/O Removable Terminal Block
AC inputs/outputs
DC inputs/outputs relay outputs specialty modules
Replacement terminal blocks are available if they are lost or damaged.
See the replacement part list in Chapter 11.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
7-10
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Terminal Block
Release Screw
Dot indicates Terminal Number 0
(or top of I/O wiring).
Removing the RTB
Below are guidelines for removing the I/O Removable Terminal
Block.
ATTENTION
!
Never install or remove I/O modules or terminal blocks while the SLC chasiss is powered.
1.
If the I/O module is already installed in the chassis, remove power to the SLC chassis.
2.
Unscrew the upper right and lower left terminal block release screws.
3.
Grasp the RTB with your thumb and forefinger and pull straight out.
4.
Label the RTB with appropriate slot, chassis, and module identification.
Terminal Block
Release Screw
Installing the RTB
Below are guidelines for installing the RTB.
1.
Be sure the color of the RTB matches the color band on the module.
ATTENTION
!
Inserting a wired RTB on an incorrect module can damage the module circuitry when power is applied.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Wiring Your I/O Modules
7-11
2.
Write the appropriate slot, chassis, and module type on the RTB label.
ATTENTION
!
Disconnect power before attempting to install or remove I/O modules or their terminal blocks.
3.
Disconnect power.
4.
Align the terminal block release screws with the mating connector in the module.
5.
Press the RTB firmly onto the connector contacts.
6.
Tighten the terminal block release screws. To avoid cracking the terminal block, alternate the tightening of the screws.
Terminal Block Release Screws
Maximum Torque:
0.9 Nm (8 in-lbs)
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
7-12
Wiring Your I/O Modules
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
8
Starting Up Your Control System
This chapter describes how to start up your control system. To accomplish this, you must go through eight procedures.
Procedures for Starting the
Control System
Start-up involves the following procedures to be carried out in sequence:
1.
Inspect your installation.
2.
Disconnect motion-causing devices.
3.
Initialize and test your processor.
4.
Test your inputs.
5.
Test your outputs.
6.
Enter and test your program.
7.
Observe control motion.
8.
Conduct a dry run of your application.
These procedures isolate problems such as wiring mistakes, equipment malfunction, and programming errors in a systematic, controlled manner.
Go through these procedures very carefully to avoid possible personal injury and equipment damage.
IMPORTANT
Do not attempt system start-up until you are thoroughly familiar with the controller components and programming/editing techniques. You must also be thoroughly familiar with the particular application.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8-2
Starting Up Your Control System
For general recommendation concerning installation safety requirements and safety requirements and safety related work practices, refer to the requirements specific to your region.
•
Europe:
Reference the standards found in EN 60204 and your national regulations.
•
United States:
refer to NFPA 70E,
Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces
.
1. Inspect Your Installation
You can often prevent serious problems in later test procedures by first making a thorough physical inspection. We recommend that you do the following:
1.
Make sure that the controller and all other devices in the system are securely mounted.
2.
Check all wiring including:
• connections from the main disconnect to the controller input
• the master control relay/emergency-stop circuit
• input device circuits
• output device circuits
Make certain that all wiring connections are correct and that there are no missing wires. Check the tightness of all terminals to make certain wires are secure.
3.
Measure the incoming line voltage. Be certain that it corresponds to controller requirements and that it falls within the specified voltage range. See specifications for input voltage
2. Disconnect
Motion-Causing Device
In the following test procedures, the controller is energized. As a safety precaution, you must make certain that machine motion does not occur. The preferred way is to disconnect the motor wires at the motor starter or the motor itself. In this way, you can test the operation of the starter coil, verifying that your output circuit is wired correctly and functioning. Similarly, the preferred way to disconnect a solenoid is to disengage the valve, leaving the coil connected.
In some instances, you may not be able to disconnect a device the preferred way. In this case, it is necessary to open the output circuit at some convenient point.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Starting Up Your Control System
8-3
For circuit testing purposes, it is best to open the circuit at a point as close as possible to the motion-causing device. For example, your output might be a relay coil that in turn energizes a motor starter; if it is impractical to disconnect the motor wires, the next best thing to do is to open the circuit at a point between the motor starter and the relay contact.
ATTENTION
!
Machine motion during system checkout can be hazardous to personnel. During the checkout procedures 3, 4, 5, and 6, you must disconnect all devices that, when energized, might cause machine motion.
3. Initialize and Test Your
Processor
When you are certain that machine motion cannot occur with the controller energized, you may begin by initializing the processor using the following steps.
1.
Energize the chassis power supply. If power is supplied to the controller and the installation is correct, the initial factory conditions for all processors will be:
Processor Name
Mode
Watchdog Values
I/O Slot Enables
Node Address
(except SLC 5/04 and 5/05)
Baud Rate
(except SLC 5/04 and 5/05)
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 only
“DEFAULT”
Program Mode or
Fault Mode
100 ms
ALL ENABLED
1
19.2K baud
Channel 0 configuration
SLC 5/04 only
SLC 5/05 only
Channel 1 configuration
Channel 1 configuration
(S:1/0 to S:1/4 = 0 0001) or
(S:1/0 to S:1/4 = 0.0001 and S:1/13 = 1)
S:3H = 0000 1010
S:11/1 through S:12/14 set to 1
Channel 1 = DH485
S:15L = 0000 0001
Channel 1 = DH485
S:15H = 0000 0100
DF1 Full Duplex
No Handshaking
19.2K Baud
CRC Error Check
Duplicate Detect On
No Parity
DH+
57.6K Baud
Default Node Address = 1
Ethernet
(1)
10 Mbps
(1) Configuring with BOOTP enabled so that a BOOTP server on the network can automatically provide the
information.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8-4
Starting Up Your Control System
ATTENTION
!
These steps are covered more extensively in your programming software and Hand-Held
Terminal user manuals. Reference these manuals if you have a problem completing one of the steps.
2.
Power up the programming device.
3.
Configure the controller.
4.
Name the program. (Becomes the processor name when downloaded.)
5.
Program a sample test rung not affecting machine operation.
6.
Save the program and controller configuration.
7.
Transfer the controller configuration and sample test program to the processor. After the new program is transferred to the processor, the CPU FAULT LED should clear. The CPU FAULT
(or “FLT” on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05) LED stops if it was flashing.
8.
Enter the Run mode.
The processor RUN status LED should turn on, indicating that the controller is in the Run mode with no CPU faults. If any
other CPU status exists, refer to Chapter 9 for recommended
action.
9.
Monitor and exercise simple test rung.
If a simple test rung operates successfully without CPU faults, you may assume basic processor functions are properly
functioning. If any other processor status exists, refer to Chapter
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
4. Test Your Inputs
Starting Up Your Control System
8-5
After successful processor initialization and test, you may begin testing inputs following these steps:
1.
Assuming you are still online with the programming device, put the controller into the Continuous Scan Test mode. This allows the processor to scan the I/O and program, but not turn on any physical outputs.
2.
Monitor the data in data File 1, the input data file. All configured
Inputs should be displayed.
3.
Make sure the first input slot, whatever slot number that may be, is shown on the monitor.
4.
Select the first input device connected to the first input terminal on the input module in the I/O chassis.
5.
Manually close and open the addressed input device.
ATTENTION
!
Never reach into a machine to actuate a device, unexpected machine operation could occur.
6.
Observe the associated bit status using the programming device monitor function. Also, observe input status LED.
a. When the input device is closed and the signal power is at the input terminal, the associated status bit is set to a one, and the input status LED should turn on.
b. When the input device is opened and signal power does not exist at the input terminal, the associated status bit is set to a
0, and the input status LED should go off.
7.
If associated bit status and input status LED match input device status, select the next input device and repeat steps 5 and 6 until all inputs in the SLC 500 chassis have been tested.
If associated bit status and input status LED does not match the input device status, follow the recommended troubleshooting steps listed below.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8-6
Starting Up Your Control System
5. Test Your Outputs
Input Troubleshooting Steps
1.
Make sure the processor is in the Continuous Scan Test mode.
2.
If associated bit status and LED status do not match the input device status, check status file S:11 and S:12 I/O slot enables.
Bits S:11/0 through S:11/15 and S:12/0 through S:12/14 should all be 1, enabling all I/O slots for the modular system.
3.
Verify proper control power to the input device.
4.
Remove the input device power and make sure circuit terminations are properly wired and tightened.
5.
Re-energize the input device power, and check for proper control voltage between the input terminal and signal common terminal.
6.
If proper input control voltage does not exist, first check minimum signal common by verifying voltage between input device power source and the input common terminal.
7.
If proper input voltage does exist, first check the minimum input current specification on the input module, and then measure the current in the input circuit. Replace the input module if necessary.
8.
If the input modules check out “OK”, and proper voltage is measured between input device source and input module common terminal, test the input device and replace if necessary.
For more information on input troubleshooting see page 10-20.
After you test all inputs, and have determined that they are functioning properly, test the outputs following these steps:
1.
Refer to page 8-2 to insure no motion will occur when any
controller output is energized.
2.
Place the controller in the Program mode.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Starting Up Your Control System
8-7
3.
Create an output test rung as shown below for each output module configured.
MOV
SOURCE B3:"XX"
DEST O0:"XX"."Y"
Let “XX” represent slot number of the output currently selected.
“Y” represents output word identifier. This rung moves a word of data from the bit file to the output file.
4.
Save the output test program and current controller configuration.
5.
Transfer the output test program to the processor.
6.
Put the controller in the Run mode.
7.
Monitor the data in data file B3 on the programming device display.
8.
Enter B3: “XX” at address prompt to select the output to be tested. “XX” represents the output slot number.
9.
Enter 1 at data prompt for the address that corresponds to the bit in the output word.
10.
Observe the output status LED and the output device.
The output status LED should turn on. The output device should be energized (unless you disconnected it to prevent machine motion).
11.
Reset the data value back to zero for the selected address and both the output status LED and output device should de-energize.
12.
If the status LED and the output device correspond to data settings in steps 10 and 11, repeat steps 8 through 11 for each output.
If the status LEDs and output device states do not correspond to the data settings in steps 9 and 11, follow the recommended output troubleshooting steps in the next section.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8-8
Starting Up Your Control System
Output Troubleshooting Steps
1.
Make sure the processor is in the Run mode.
2.
Verify proper addressing of the output test rung from the previous page.
3.
Using a programming device, locate the output data file and bit data file. See if the status of the associated bits between these files match.
4.
If the status of the bits match in step 3, and if the status of the output LED match the status of the bits,
but
the status of the output device is different, continue to step 5.
If the output status LED does not match associated bit status, check status file S:11 and S:12 I/O slot enables. Bits S:11/0 through S:11/15 and S:12/0 through S:12/14 should all be 1 enabling all I/O slots for the modular system.
If the output slot enable was verified, then try exchanging the output module under test with identical hardware and retest. If the new hardware works properly, replace the original.
5.
Verify proper output voltage at the output terminal and then at the output device.
6.
De-energize the output circuit and check all output circuit terminations and wire routes.
7.
If proper output voltage does not exist at the output device and the power source is adequate to drive the output device, test the output device and replace it if necessary.
For more information on output troubleshooting, see page 10-21.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Starting Up Your Control System
8-9
6. Enter and Test Your
Program
After you test all inputs and outputs and they are functioning properly, follow the steps below to safely and successfully enter and test your specific application program. (For extra assistance, see the
Hand-Held Terminal User Manual
or your programming software user manual.)
1.
Verify the offline program.
After the program has been entered in the offline edit file mode, program verification may begin.
Remaining in the offline edit file mode, use the cursor keys and/or search function of your programming device to inspect every instruction and rung for errors.
2.
Check your written program, rung for rung, against the program entered into the offline memory. The most common errors found in program entry are:
• incorrect addressing of instructions
• omission of an instruction
• more than one output instruction programmed using the same address
3.
Transfer the program into the processor: a. Place your programming device online.
b. Place the processor into Program mode.
c. Select the download function when using the Hand-Held
Terminal or the restore function when using your programming software.
4.
Verify the online program transfer: a. Select monitor file function.
b. Cursor through the program to verify that you selected the right program.
5.
Conduct a single-scan program test: a. Select the monitor file function and place the cursor on the first rung.
b. Select the Test mode.
c. Select Single-Scan (SSN) test. In this test mode, the processor executes a single operating cycle, which includes reading the inputs, executing the ladder program, and updating all data without energizing the output circuits. However, the monitor file function will identify output status as if outputs were enabled.
Timers are also incremented a minimum of 10 milliseconds each single scan.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8-10
Starting Up Your Control System
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001 d. Simulate the input conditions necessary to execute the current monitored rung of the program. If it is not practical to manually activate the input device, use the force function to simulate the proper condition.
ATTENTION
Never reach into a machine to actuate a device. Unexpected machine operation could occur.
!
e. Activate a single operating scan as outlined in the programming device user manual.
f. Verify the intended effects on the output instructions for that rung and overall program logic effects.
g. Select the next program rung and repeat test procedures as listed above until the entire program has been tested.
6.
Conduct a continuous scan program test.
Once the individual single scan rung tests have been completed and proper program operation verified, a continuous scan test is appropriate before motion checkout.
The mode simulates the controller Run mode without energizing the external outputs.
Use the following steps to further verify proper program and system function operation.
a. Remain or return to an online condition with the processor.
b. Monitor the file.
c. Select Test mode.
d. Select the Continuous Scan test.
e. Simulate the input conditions necessary to execute system functions.
f. Verify the intended operation of each system function and the effects of other system functions.
ATTENTION
!
Never reach into a machine to actuate a device. Unexpected machine operation could occur.
Starting Up Your Control System
8-11
7. Observe Control Motion
Now that program execution has been verified, checkout of control motion can begin. All persons involved with the programming, installation, layout design, machine or process design and maintenance should be involved in making decisions for determining the best and safest way to test the total system.
The following procedures are general in nature. Individual conditions may warrant their modification. The basic approach is to initiate testing with the least amount of machine motion. Only some outputs are allowed to generate machine motion. Then additional machine motion can be gradually added, thereby allowing any problems to be detected more easily under controlled conditions. The following procedure provides the steps for testing machine motion using one output at a time.
ATTENTION
!
During all phases of checkout, station a person ready to operate an emergency-stop switch if necessary.
The emergency-stop switch will de-energize the master control relay and remove power from the machine. This circuit must be hardwired only, it
must not
be programmed.
Use the following procedures:
1.
Identify the first output device to be tested and reconnect its wiring.
ATTENTION
!
Contact with AC line potential may cause injury to personnel. When reconnecting wiring, make sure that the AC power disconnect switch is opened.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8-12
Starting Up Your Control System
2.
Place the controller in the Run mode and observe the behavior of the output device. To do this, simulate the input conditions necessary to energize the output in the program. If it is not practical to manually activate an input device, use the force function to simulate the proper input condition.
ATTENTION
!
Never reach into a machine to actuate a device, unexpected machine operation could occur.
3.
Repeat steps 1 and 2, testing each output device, one at a time.
8. Conduct a Dry Run
ATTENTION
!
During all phases of checkout, station a person ready to operate an emergency-stop switch if necessary. The emergency-stop switch will de-energize the master control relay and remove power from the machine. This circuit must be hardwired only, it
must not
be programmed.
After thoroughly checking out the controller system and program, proceed with a dry run of the application with all of the output devices enabled. This dry run will vary with the application. A machine tool dry run would test the program with all outputs enabled but without tooling an actual part.
After you check out the entire system, and your dry run has been completed satisfactorily, we recommend that you load your program into an EEPROM memory module for back-up program storage. Refer to the
Hand-Held Terminal User Manual
(Catalog Number
1747-NP002) or your programming software’s user manual for directions on loading the EEPROM from RAM.
This step completes start-up procedures. Your SLC programmable controller is now ready for operation.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
9
Maintaining Your Control System
This chapter covers the following maintenance issues:
• handling and storing battery, Catalog Number 1747-BA
• installing and replacing the battery of the SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processor
• replacing your SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 battery
• replacing retainer clips on an I/O module
• replacing a fuse on the power supply
See page 3-13 for important information on testing the Master Control
Relay Circuit and Preventive Maintenance.
1
Handling and Storing
Battery, Catalog Number
1747-BA
Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards.
Handling
•
Use only for the intended operation.
•
Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures.
•
Do not ship on passenger aircraft.
ATTENTION
!
Do not charge the batteries. An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns.
Do not open, puncture, crush, or otherwise mutilate the batteries. A possibility of an explosion exists and/or toxic, corrosive, and flammable liquids would be exposed.
Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures. Do not attempt to solder batteries. An explosion could result.
Do not short positive and negative terminals together. Excessive heat can build up and cause severe burns
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
9-2
Maintaining Your Control System
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Storing
Store the lithium batteries in a cool, dry environment, typically +20°C to +25°C (+68°F to +77°F) and 40% to 60% relative humidity. Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container, away from flammable materials.
Transporting
One or Two Batteries — Each battery contains 0.23 grams of lithium.
Therefore, up to two batteries can be shipped together within the
United States without restriction. Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ.
Three or More Batteries — Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of Transportation (DOT) in the Code of
Federal Regulations, CFR49, “Transportation.” An exemption to these regulations, DOT - E7052, covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids. This exemption authorizes transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle, rail freight, cargo vessel, and cargo-only aircraft, providing certain conditions are met.
Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted.
A special provision of DOT-E7052 (11th Rev., October 21, 1982, par.
8-a) provides that:
“Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49
CFR 173.22a in any of these packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received.”
The Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a, relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions. In part, it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption.
Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries, such as the IATA Restricted Articles Regulations of the
International Air Transport Association, Geneva, Switzerland.
IMPORTANT
Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised.
Maintaining Your Control System
9-3
Disposal
ATTENTION
!
Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash collection. Explosion or violent rupture is possible. Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting, compacting, or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal.
For disposal, batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations, to a proper disposal site. The U.S.
Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of “Lithium batteries for disposal” by motor vehicle only in regulation 173.1015 of
CFR 49 (effective January 5, 1983). For additional information contact:
U.S. Department of Transportation
Research and Special Programs Administration
400 Seventh Street, S.W.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries, the material contained may be considered toxic, reactive, or corrosive. The person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so. State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials.
For a lithium battery product safety data sheet, contact the manufacturer: or Sanyo Energy Corporation
600 Supreme Drive
Bensenville, Il 60106
USA
Tadarand Electronics
2 Seaview Blvd.
Port Washington, NY 11050
USA
Installing and Replacing the Battery of the SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 Processor
Back-up power for RAM is provided by a replaceable battery. The lithium battery provides back-up for approximately five years for the
1747-L511 and two years for the 1747-L514 and 1747-L524. A red
BATTERY LOW LED alerts you when the battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level.
Once the BATTERY LOW LED goes on, do
not
remove processor power or your program may be lost. Replace the battery as soon as possible. You can replace the battery while the processor is powered.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
9-4
Maintaining Your Control System
For battery installation or replacement do the following:
1.
Open the door of the processor.
2.
If you are: installing a battery in a new processor (battery never installed before), remove the jumper from the battery connector socket.
Store the jumper in safe place for possible future use without the battery.
replacing an old battery, unplug the existing battery connector and remove from the retainer clips. The figure below shows where to install the battery in a SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processor.
3.
Insert a new or replacement battery in the holder making sure it is held in by the retainer clips.
4.
Plug the battery connector into the socket. See the following figure.
White
Lead
Red Lead
Retainer
Clips
Battery
Connector
+
5.
Close the processor door.
Replacing Your SLC 5/03,
SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05
Battery
Your SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor provides back-up power for RAM through a replaceable lithium battery. This battery provides back-up for approximately 2 years. A BATT LED on the front of the processor alerts you when the battery voltage has fallen below a threshold level.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Maintaining Your Control System
9-5
To replace the lithium battery, follow these steps:
ATTENTION
!
Do not remove the processor from the SLC 500 chassis until all power is removed from the SLC 500 power supply.
1.
Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2.
Remove the processor from the chassis by pressing the retainer clips at both the top and bottom of the module and slide it out.
ATTENTION
!
Do not expose the processor to surfaces or other areas that may typically hold an electrostatic charge. Electrostatic charges can alter or destroy memory.
3.
Unplug the battery connector. The figure below shows the battery connector location.
Battery
Red White
Battery
Connector
IMPORTANT
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors have a capacitor that provides at least 30 minutes of battery back-up while the battery is disconnected.
Data in RAM is not lost if the battery is replaced within 30 minutes.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
9-6
Maintaining Your Control System
4.
Remove the battery from the retaining clips.
5.
Insert a new battery into the battery retaining clips.
6.
Plug the battery connector into the socket as shown in the figure
7.
Insert the module back into the SLC 500 chassis.
8.
Restore power to the SLC 500 power supply.
Replacing Retainer Clips on an I/O Module
If it becomes necessary to replace the retainer clip (also called self-locking tab), order Catalog Number 1746-R15 (4 per package).
Retainer Clip
Holding Tabs
Removing Damaged Retainer Clips
If necessary, pry off the broken retainer clip from the bottom with a screwdriver. Do not twist it off. You can damage the module.
Retainer Clip
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Maintaining Your Control System
9-7
Installing New Retainer Clips
Insert one of the pins of the retainer clip into the hole in the I/O module and then snap the other end in place.
Replacing a Fuse on the
Power Supply
To replace a fuse on the power supply (only for the 1746-P1, -P2, and
-P3), do the following:
1.
Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2.
Open the door on the power supply and use a fuse puller to remove the fuse.
ATTENTION
!
Use only replacement fuses of the type and rating specified for the unit. Improper fuse selection can result in equipment damage.
3.
Install a replacement fuse. See page 2-14 for replacements. See
the figure below for fuse placement.
POWER
Fuse
3-Pin Jumper
ATTENTION
!
The exposed pins on the 3-pin jumper is electrically live. Contact with the pin may cause injury to personnel.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
9-8
Maintaining Your Control System
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
10
Troubleshooting
In this chapter, you will learn about:
• contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance
• tips for troubleshooting your control system
• troubleshooting the SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors
• troubleshooting the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
• troubleshooting your input modules
• troubleshooting your output modules
Contacting Rockwell
Automation for Assistance
If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for assistance, it is helpful to obtain the following (prior to calling):
• processor type, series letter, operating system (OS) number
(obtained from the status file), firmware (FRN) number (see label on side of processor module)
• processor LED status
• processor error codes (found in S:6 of status file)
• hardware types in system (I/O modules, chassis)
• revision of programming device (on the main menu of the
Hand-Held Terminal or programming software)
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-2
Troubleshooting
Tips for Troubleshooting
Your Control System
When troubleshooting, pay careful attention to these general warnings:
ATTENTION
!
Have all personnel remain clear of the controller and equipment when power is applied. The problem may be intermittent and sudden unexpected machine motion could result in injury. Have someone ready to operate an emergency-stop switch in case it becomes necessary to shut off power to the controller equipment. Also, see NFPA 70E Part II for additional guidelines for safety-related work practices.
Never reach into a machine to actuate a switch since unexpected machine motion can occur and cause injury.
Remove all electrical power at the main power disconnect switches before checking electrical connections or inputs/outputs causing machine motion.
The first step in the troubleshooting procedure is to identify the problem and its source.
The majority of faults can be located and corrected by observing the diagnostic indicators on the front of the power supply, processor unit and I/O modules. These indicators, along with error codes identified in the programming device user manual and programmer’s monitor, help trace the source of the fault to the user’s input/output devices, wiring, or the controller.
Removing Power
Before working on a SLC 500 modular system, always remove the power supply input power at the main power disconnect switch.
The power LED on the power supply indicates that DC power is being supplied to the chassis. The LED could be off when incoming power is present.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-3
Replacing Fuses
When replacing a fuse, be sure to remove all power from the system.
Program Alteration
There are several causes of alteration to the user program, including extreme environmental conditions, Electromagnetic Interference
(EMI), improper grounding, improper wiring connections, and unauthorized tampering. If you suspect the memory has been altered, check the program against a previously saved program on an
EEPROM, UVPROM or Flash EPROM module.
Troubleshooting the SLC
5/01 and SLC 5/02
Processors
To receive the maximum benefit of this troubleshooting section, follow these steps:
1.
Identify the status of your processor LEDs. See Chapter 5 for a
description of LEDs and their different states.
2.
Using the tables on the following pages, match your processor and power supply LEDs with the status LEDs located in the first column.
3.
Once the status LEDs are matched to the appropriate table, move across the table identifying error description and probable causes.
4.
Follow the recommended action steps for each probable cause until the error is corrected.
5.
If recommended actions do not correct the error, contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-4
Troubleshooting
Identifying SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
The following LEDs and tables provide you with information regarding error messages, possible cause(s) for the error, and recommended action to resolve the error.
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
All LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Inadequate system power
Probable Cause Recommended Action
No line power
Power supply fuse blown
1. Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power terminals.
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
1. Check the incoming power fuse, check for proper incoming power connections. Replace fuse.
2. If fuse blows again, replace the power supply. See page
•
CPU Fault LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
Inadequate system power
Power supply overload
Defective power supply
Improper line power voltage selection
1. Remove line power to power supply. remove several output modules from the chassis. wait five minutes. reapply power.
2. If condition reoccurs, re-calculate module configuration power required and verify proper power supply selection.
See page 2-13. This problem can occur intermittently if
power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading and temperature varies.
1. Recheck other probable causes.
2. Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for possible transient or shorting.
3. Replace the power supply.
Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-5
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Processor not in run mode
Probable Cause Recommended Action
Either improper mode selected or user program logic error
Line power out of operating range
Improper seating of power supply and/or processor in the chassis
1. Verify selected processor mode.
2. If in program or test mode, try to enter run mode.
3. If in suspend mode, check user program logic for suspend instructions.
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual , publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
1. Check proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection and incoming power connections.
2. Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power
connections. See page 6-7 for power supply installation.
1. Remove power and inspect the power supply and processor chassis connections.
2. Re-install the devices and re-apply power.
IMPORTANT
Defective processor, power supply, or chassis
The processor only operates in slot 0 of the first chassis.
1. Attempt to put processor in run mode in existing chassis.
2. Place the processor in another chassis. Apply power, reconfigure, and attempt to put processor in run mode. If unsuccessful, replace the processor.
3. Place the power supply in another chassis and test. If unsuccessful, replace the power supply. If successful, replace the original chassis.
•
Power LED On
•
Run LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
System Inoperable,
No Major CPU
Faults Detected
User program logic error
Defective I/O devices or I/O wiring
•
Power LED On
•
CPU Fault LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
CPU Fault CPU memory error
Faulty memory module
Faulty processor or power supply
1. Monitor logic in Run mode and verify desired I/O status.
2. Check for minor CPU faults.
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual , publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
Test inputs and outputs according to I/O troubleshooting
procedures starting on page 10-19.
Cycle power.
1. Remove power and then remove the memory module from the processor.
2. Re-install the processor and re-apply power to the power supply. If steady CPU Fault LED changes to flashing, replace the existing memory module with a replacement module.
See Chapter 6 for removing and installing memory modules.
1. Place the processor in another chassis not in the existing system and cycle power. If steady CPU Fault LED reappears, replace the processor.
2. If CPU Fault LED clears, monitor the line power going to the power supply in existing system. Replace existing system power supply if line power checks OK.
Processor firmware installed incorrectly
If upgrading the processor to a different firmware level, verify that the firmware chip orientation matches the upgrade kit directions.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-6
Troubleshooting
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
CPU Fault LED
Flashing
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
CPU Major Fault
Probable Cause Recommended Action
Initial CPU factory power-up condition
1. See Chapter 8 and follow the start-up procedures.
2. Clear processor memory to get rid of the flashing CPU
Fault LED.
Hardware/software
Major Fault detected
(erratic, repetitive power cycling can cause a processor major hardware fault)
1. Monitor Status File word S:6 for major error code.
2. Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual , publication 1747-NP002, or the SLC 500 Instruction Set
Reference Manual , publication 1747-RM001C-EN-P, for error codes and additional troubleshooting information.
3. Remove hardware/software condition causing fault.
4. Clear Status File S:1/13 major error bits, if set.
5. Clear Status File S:5 major error bits, if set.
6. Clear Status File S:6 major error code (optional).
7. Attempt to put processor in run mode.
If unsuccessful, repeat recommended action steps above.
•
Power LED On
•
Run LED On
•
Forced I/O LED ON
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
Run LED On
•
Forced I/O LED
Flashing
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
CPU Fault LED
Flashing
•
Battery Low LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of SLC 5/02
Comm LED does not matter
System does not operate per ladder logic
System does not operate per programmed forces
CPU Major Error with Low or No
Battery Back-up
User forced I/O is disablng operation
User programmed forces are not enabled
Loss of RAM during power-down
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify forced I/O.
2. Disable appropriate forces and test system conditions again.
Refer to either the
Hand-Held Terminal User Manual
, publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify programmed forces.
2. Enable appropriate forces and test system conditions again. Once forces are enabled, the Forced I/O LED turns
On (steady).
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual , publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
1. Verify battery is connected. See page 9-3.
2. Replace the battery if you want RAM battery backup.
See page 9-3. If you want to back up RAM with the
capacitor in a SLC 5/01 (1747-L511), add or replace the
Battery Low LED jumper.
3. Refer to processor major fault recommended action steps.
Refer to either the Hand-Held Terminal User Manual , publication
1747-NP002, or your programming software documentation.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-7
Identifying SLC 5/02 Processor Communication Errors
SLC 5/02 Processor Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate The Following
Error Exsits
•
Power LED On
•
Comm LED Off
•
CPU Fault LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run,
Forced I/O, and
Battery Low LEDs does not matter
The SLC 5/02 processor is not receiving data. No communication to the programmer.
•
Power LED On
•
Comm LED On
•
CPU Fault LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run,
•
•
•
Forced I/O, and
Battery Low LEDs does not matter
Power LED On
CPU Fault LED On
Status of all other
LEDs does not matter
The SLC 5/02 processor is receiving data, but is not communicating with the programmer
A fatal error has occured
Probable Cause Recommended Action
DH-485 communication parameters are improperly set up.
Bad Connection of
Communication
Device
Low or No Power to Communication
Device
DH-485 communication parameters are set up improperly.
Excessive noise or a faulty SLC 5/02 processor
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be different.
2. Try different combinations of: a. baud rate (default is 19.2K) b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address. (default is
31)
1. Check cable continuity.
2. Check cable connections between programmer and processor.
3. Check communication device (for example, the
1747-PIC). replace if necessary.
1. Verify proper power supply selection and backplane loading. (1747-PIC and 1747-AIC draw power off the backplane.)
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be different.
2. Try different combinations of: a. baud rate (default is 19.2K) b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address. (default is
31)
1. Cycle power to obtain flashing CPU Fault LED and default program.
2. Examine the error code following the power cycle. Take appropriate action.
3. Reload the program.
4. Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-8
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the SLC
5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 Processors
Between the time you apply power to an SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC
5/05 processor and the communications are established via a connected programming device, the only form of communication between you and the processor is through the LED display.
When power is applied, all of the LEDs flash on and then off while the processor conducts hardware tests. This is part of the normal powerup sequence. Following the selftest by the processor, all the
LEDs again flash on momentarily. If a user program is in a running state, the RUN LED will be on. If a fault exists within the processor, the FLT LED is on.
To receive the maximum benefit of this troubleshooting section, follow these steps:
1.
Identify the status of your processor LEDs. See Chapter 5 for
description of LEDs and their different states.
2.
Using the tables on the following pages, match your processor and power supply LEDs with the status LEDs located in the first column.
3.
Once the status LEDs are matched to the appropriate table, move across the table identifying error description and probable causes.
4.
Then follow the recommended action steps for each probable cause until the cause is identified.
5.
If recommended actions do not identify the trouble cause, contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or distributor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-9
Clearing SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Faults Using the Keyswitch
Toggle the keyswitch from RUN to PROG and then back to RUN; this clears the fault. If the keyswitch is left in the RUN position, the processor mode cannot be changed from a programmer/operator interface device. If you return the keyswitch to the REM position, you can then use a programmer/operator interface device to change the processor mode.
ATTENTION
!
If you clear a processor fault using the keyswitch, the processor immediately enters the Run mode.
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
The following LEDs and tables provide you with information regarding error messages, possible cause(s) for the error, and recommended action to resolve the error.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
All LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Inadequate system power
Probable Cause Recommended Action
No line power 1. Verify proper line voltage and connections on the power terminals.
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
Power supply fuse blown
Power supply overload
1. Check the incoming power fuse, check for proper incoming power connections. Replace fuse.
2. If fuse blows again, replace the power supply. See page
1. Remove line power to power supply. remove several output modules from the chassis. wait five minutes. reapply power.
2. If condition reoccurs, re-calculate module configuration power required and verify proper power supply selection.
See page 2-13. This problem can occur intermittently if
power supply is slightly overloaded when output loading and temperature varies.
Defective power supply
1. Recheck other probable causes.
2. Monitor the line power to chassis power supply for possible transient or shorting.
3. Replace the power supply.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-10
Troubleshooting
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
FLT LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
Run LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Inadequate system power
Processor not in run mode
Probable Cause Recommended Action
Improper line power voltage selection
Either improper mode selected or user program logic error
Line power out of operating range
Improper seating of power supply and/or processor in the chassis
Defective processor, power supply, or chassis
System Inoperable,
No Major CPU
Faults Detected
User program logic error
Defective I/O devices or I/O wiring
Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
1. Verify selected processor mode.
2. If in program or test mode, try to enter run mode.
a. If the keyswitch is in the REM position and there is no key, use the programmer.
b. If the keyswitch is in the REM or PROG position and you have the key, toggle to the RUN position.
3. If in suspend mode, check user program logic for suspend instructions.
Refer to your programming software documentation.
1. Check proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection and incoming power connections.
2. Monitor for proper line voltage at the incoming power
connections. See page 6-7 for power supply installation.
1. Remove power and inspect the power supply and processor chassis connections.
2. Re-install the devices and re-apply power.
IMPORTANT
The processor only operates in slot 0 of the first chassis.
1. Attempt to put processor in run mode in existing chassis.
a. If the keyswitch is in the REM position and there is no key, use the programmer.
b. If the keyswitch is in the REM or PROG position and you have the key, toggle to the RUN position.
2. Place the processor in another chassis. Apply power, reconfigure, and attempt to put processor in run mode. If unsuccessful, replace the processor.
3. Place the power supply in another chassis and test. If unsuccessful, replace the power supply. If successful, replace the original chassis.
1. Monitor logic in Run mode and verify desired I/O status.
2. Check for minor CPU faults.
Refer to your programming software documentation.
Test inputs and outputs according to I/O troubleshooting
procedures starting on page 10-19.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-11
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
CPU Fault LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
CPU Fault
•
Power LED On
•
CPU Fault LED
Flashing
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
CPU Major Fault
Probable Cause Recommended Action
CPU memory error Cycle power.
Faulty memory module
1. Remove power and then remove the memory module from the processor.
2. Re-install the processor and re-apply power to the power supply. If steady CPU Fault LED changes to flashing, replace the existing memory module with a replacement module.
Refer to Chapter 6 for removing and installing memory modules.
Faulty processor or power supply
Processor firmware installed incorrectly
If upgrading the processor to a different firmware level, verify that the firmware chip orientation matches the upgrade kit directions.
Initial CPU factory power-up condition
1. Place the processor in another chassis not in the existing system and cycle power. If steady CPU Fault LED reappears, replace the processor.
2. If CPU Fault LED clears, monitor the line power going to the power supply in existing system. Replace existing system power supply if line power checks OK.
Hardware/software
Major Fault detected
(erratic, repetitive power cycling can cause a processor major hardware fault)
1. See Chapter 8 and follow the start-up procedures.
2. Clear processor memory to get rid of the flashing CPU
Fault LED.
1. Use programmer to monitor and clear the fault (or if keyswitch in REM position): a. Monitor Status File word S:6 for major error code.
b. Refer to your programming software documentation or the Instruction Set Reference Manual
, publication
1747-RM001C-EN-P, for error codes and additional troubleshooting information.
c. Remove hardware/software condition causing fault.
d. Clear Status File S:1/13 major error bits, if set.
e. Clear Status File S:5 major error bits, if set.
f. Clear Status File S:6 major error code (optional).
g. Attempt to put processor in run mode.
If unsuccessful, repeat recommended action steps above.
2. Use the keyswitch to clear the fault. Toggle the
keyswitch to PROG and back to RUN. (See page 10-9). If
fault occurs again, use programmer to get error code and determine the source of the problem.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-12
Troubleshooting
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
Run LED On
•
Force LED ON
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
Run LED On
•
Force LED Flashing
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
FLT LED Flashing
•
Batt LED On
•
All Other LEDs Off
•
Status of any
Communication LED does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
System does not operate per ladder logic
System does not operate per programmed forces
CPU Major Error with Low or No
Battery Back-up
Probable Cause Recommended Action
User forced I/O is disablng operation
User programmed forces are not enabled
Loss of RAM during power-down
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify forced I/O.
2. Disable appropriate forces and test system conditions again.
Refer to your programming software documentation.
1. Monitor program file on-line and identify programmed forces.
2. Enable appropriate forces and test system conditions again. Once forces are enabled, the Force LED turns On
(steady).
Refer to your programming software documentation.
1. Verify battery is connected. See page 9-3.
2. Replace the battery if you want RAM battery backup.
3. Refer to processor major fault recommended action steps.
Refer to your programming software documentation.
Identifying SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor
Communication Errors
SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET LED Off
•
FLT LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run, Force,
Batt, and RS232
LEDs does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Fatal Error and No
Communication
Probable Cause Recommended Action
Inadequate System
Power
Communication
Channel is Shut
Down
Communication
Channel is
Damaged
1. Check line power.
2. Check 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
page 6-7. Also, see the recommended actions for
inadequate system power on page 10-9.
Check communication channel configuration with your
programming software. Also, see page 10-17 to return the
processor to initial factory conditions.
Replace the processor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-13
SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
RS232 LED Off
•
FLT LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run; Force;
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET; or Batt LEDs does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
Fatal Error and No
Communication
Duplicate drop is detected. (The DH+
LED is flashing red.)
An ENET fault is being reported via a code. (The ENET
LED is flashing red.)
Probable Cause
Inadequate System
Power
Communication
Channel is Shut
Down
Communication
Channel is
Damaged
Bad Connection of
Communication
Device
Low or No Power to Communication
Device
Another DH+ device is already on the DH+ network at this node address.
A hardware or software fault has occured.
Recommended Action
1. Check line power.
2. Check 120/240V power supply jumper selection. See
page 6-7. Also, see the recommended actions for
inadequate system power on page 10-9.
Check communication channel configuration with your
programming software. Also, see page 10-17 to return the
processor to initial factory conditions.
Replace the processor.
Channel
Configured for DF1 or User Mode
See your programming software documentation for channel configuration information.
•
Power LED On
•
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET LED Flashing
•
FLT LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run, Force,
Batt, and RS232
LEDs does not matter
The SLC 5/03 or
SLC 5/04 processor is trying to establish communication, but cannot find other active nodes.
(The DH-485 or
DH+ LED is flashing green.)
DH-485 or DH+ communication parameters are improperly set up.
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be different.
2. Try different combinations of: a. baud rate (default is 19.2K for DH-485 and 57.6K for
DH+) b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address. (default is 31 for DH-485)
Refer to your programming software for channel configuration information.
1. Check cable continuity.
2. Check cable connections between programmer and processor.
3. Check communication device (for example, the
1747-PIC). replace if necessary.
1. Verify proper power supply selection and backplane loading. (1747-PIC and 1747-AIC draw power off the backplane.)
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
1. Remove this device from the DH+ network.
2. Cycle power.
3. Reset the node address to an unused node before reconnecting device to the DH+ network. (Can perform reset if on-line via channel 0 RS-232 port without disconnecting from DH+.)
Contact Rockwell Automation for assistance.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-14
Troubleshooting
SLC 5/03. SLC 4/04, and SLC 5/05 Communication Errors
If the LEDs Indicate
•
Power LED On
•
RS232 LED Flashing
•
FLT LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run; Force;
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET; or Batt LEDs does not matter
•
Power LED On
•
RS232 LED Off
•
FLT LED Off or
Flashing
•
Status of Run; Force;
DH-485, DH+, or
ENET; or Batt LEDs does not matter
•
•
•
Power LED On
FLT LED On
Status of all other
LEDs does not matter
The Following
Error Exists
The processor is trying to establish communication, but cannot find other active nodes.
Probable Cause Recommended Action
DH-485 communication parameters are set up improperly.
1. Check communication parameters of programmer.
Programmer and processor baud rate must match.
Programmer and processor node addresses must be different.
2. Try different combinations of: a. baud rate (default is 19.2K for DH-485) b. node address (default is 1)
3. Try to increase the maximum node address. (default is 31 for DH-485)
Refer to your programming software for channel configuration information.
The processor is not transmitting.
A fatal error has occured
Bad Connection of
Communication
Device
Low or No Power to Communication
Device
Channel is configured for
DH-485 mode.
RS232/DF1 parameters are set up improperly.
Check communication parameters of channel configuration.
Also, refer to your programming software documentation.
Check the following communication parameters of programmer and channel configuration:
1. baud rate - programmer and processor baud rates must match
2. DF1 node addresses (default is 1 for half-duplex, and 9 for full-duplex) - programmer and processor addresses must be different
3. error checking
4. number of data bits
Hardware problem
Excessive noise or a faulty processor
1. Check cable continuity.
2. Check cable connections between programmer and processor.
3. Check communication device (for example, the
1747-PIC). replace if necessary.
1. Verify proper power supply selection and backplane loading. (1747-PIC and 1747-AIC draw power off the backplane.)
2. Verify proper 120/240V power supply jumper selection.
1. Check cable connections.
2. Check cable pinouts. Also, see Appendix B for RS-232
pinouts.
1. Cycle power to obtain flashing FLT LED and default program.
2. Examine the error code following the power cycle. Take appropriate action.
3. Reload the program.
4. Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-15
Identifying Processor
Errors while Downloading an Operating System
The download process of the operating system by the SLC 5/03, SLC
5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors takes up to 2.5 minutes. While the download is in progress, the RUN and FLT LEDs remain off. The other four LEDs — RS232, DH485 (DH
+
on the SLC 5/04 and ENET on the SLC 5/05), FORCE, and BATT — turn on and off in a walking bit sequence. If the download is successful, these four LEDs remain on together.
ATTENTION
!
Jumper J4, located on the bottom corner of the motherboard, provides write-protection from any download of a new operating system. The “out of the box” position of this jumper is “PROTECT,” or write-protect. Without the jumper, the processors are write-protected.
Catalog and Serial
Number Label
Place the operating system upgrade label here.
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 processors are protected from the operating system download when jumper J4 is in this position:
OR
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 processors accept the operating system download when jumper J4 is in this position:
CAT
SLC 500
PROCESSOR UNIT
SER FAC
SERIAL NO.
PROC. REV.
PLACE OS UPGRADE LABEL HERE
OS #
OPERATING SYSTEM INFO
SER FRN
WHITE
RED
-
+
BATTERY
PROTECT
1
3
PROGRAM
J4
UL
CURRENT REQUIREMENTS: 1A @ 5 VDC
200mA @ 24 VDC
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.
FOR HAZ. LOC. A196
SA
®
CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2
OPERATING TEMPERATURE CODE T3C
MADE IN USA
Daughter Board
Operating System
Mother Board
Upgrade/Memory Module
Socket
Jumper J4
If the download is
not
successful, the FLT LED turns on and a combination of LEDs flash on and off indicating an error condition.
The following table provides you with information regarding error messages, possible cause(s) for the error, and recommended action to resolve the error.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-16
Troubleshooting
LED Status The Following
Error Exists
Probable Cause Recommended Action
On
On
On
Off Off On
Off On
Off On
On
On
Off On
On
On
Off NVRAM error
Off On Hardware
Watchdog
Timeout
Off Off Fatal Hardware
Error
On Off Off On Off On On Corrupted
Operating
System Memory
Module
On Off On On Off On Off Flash EPROM
Failure
On
On
On
On
Off On
Off On
On
On
Off Off On
Off Off On
On On
Off On
On
On
On
On
Off Corrupt or
On
Missing
Operating
System
Downloadable
Operating
System Failure
Off Incompatible
On
Platform
Memory
Write-Protected
Major hardware failure due to noise, improper grounding, or poor power source.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the error clears, you should be able to download the operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
Major hardware failure due to noise, improper grounding, or poor power source.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the error clears, you should be able to download the operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
Major hardware failure due to noise, improper grounding, or poor power source.
The operating system on the Flash EPROM is corrupt.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the error clears, you should be able to download the operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the error persists, either contact your Rockwell Automation representative for a new operating system memory module, or download the old operating system.
The processor flash is corrupt.
The operating system is missing or has been corrupted.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the error clears, you should be able to download the operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative.
Cycle power and see if the error repeats itself. If the error clears, you should be able to download the operating system. If the error persists, contact your
Rockwell Automation representative for a new operating system.
Download the operating system.
Failure during transmission of downloadable operating system.
The upgrade of the operating system is incompatible with the processor hardware.
An attempt was made to download the operating sytem onto write-protected memory.
Use an operating system that is compatible with your processor hardware.
Change the jumper on the processor to the program position.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-17
Returning the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processors to
“Initial Factory Conditions”
We
only
recommend this procedure if the communication channels have been shut down due to the configuration parameters, or if you absolutely cannot establish communications with the processor.
ATTENTION
!
If you return the processor to the initial factory conditions, the user program and communication configurations are returned to their default settings.
To return the processor to initial factory conditions:
1.
Remove power from the SLC 500 power supply.
2.
Remove the processor from the chassis.
3.
Disconnect the battery
by removing the battery connector from its socket.
4.
Locate the VBB and GND connections on the right side of the motherboard.
5.
Place a small bladed screwdriver across the VBB and GND connections and hold for 60 seconds. This returns the processor to the initial factory conditions.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-18
Troubleshooting
SLC 5/03 (1747-L531 and 1747-L532)
Keyswitch
Mother Board
Right Side View
SLC 5/04 (1747-L541, 1747-L542, and 1747-L543)
SLC 5/05 (1747-L551, 1747-L552, and 1747-L553)
GND
VBB
Keyswitch
GND VBB
Mother Board
Right Side View
GND
VBB
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-19
Troubleshooting Your Input
Modules
The following will assist you in troubleshooting your input modules.
Input Circuit Operation
An input circuit responds to an input signal in the following manner:
1.
An input filter removes false signals due to contact bounce or electrical interference.
2.
Opto-electrical isolation protects the input circuit and backplane circuits by isolating logic circuits from input signals.
3.
Logic circuits process the signal.
4.
An input LED turns on or off indicating the status of the corresponding input device.
Input
Input
Conditioning
Opto-Electrical
Isolation
Logic
Circuits
Backplane
LED
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-20
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your Input Modules
If your Input
Circuit LED is
On
Off
And Your Input
Device is
And
On/Closed/Activated Your input device will not turn off.
Your program operates as though it is off.
Probable Cause
Device is shorted or damaged.
Off/Open/Deactivated Your program operates as
On/Closed/Activated though it is on and/or the input circuit will not turn off.
Your program operates as though it is off and/or the input circuit will not turn on.
Input circuit is damaged.
Input is forced off in program.
Input device Off-state leakage current exceeds input circuit specification.
Input device is shorted or damaged.
Input circuit is damaged.
Input circuit is incompatible.
Low voltage across the input.
Incorrect wiring or an open circuit.
Input signal turn-on time too fast for input circuit.
Input circuit is damaged.
Recommended Action
Verify device operation. Replace device.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input circuit. Replace module.
Check specification and sink/source compatibility (if DC input).
Check the voltage across input circuit and check source voltage.
Check wiring and COMmon connections.
Check timing specifications.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input circuit. Replace module.
Verify operation. Replace device.
Off/Open/Deactivated Your input device will not turn on.
Your program operates as though it is on.
Input device is shorted or damaged.
Input is forced on in program.
Verify device operation. Replace device.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input circuit. Replace module.
Check the FORCED I/O or FORCE LED on processor and remove forces.
Check device and input circuit specifications. Use load resistor to bleed-off current.
Input circuit is damaged.
Check processor FORCED I/O or
FORCE LED and remove forces. Verify proper wiring. Try other input circuit.
Replace module.
Verify proper wiring. Try other input circuit. Replace module.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-21
Troubleshooting Your
Output Modules
The following will assist you in troubleshooting your output modules.
Output Circuit Operation
An output circuit controls the output signal in the following manner:
1.
Logic circuits determine the output status.
2.
An output LED indicates the status of the output signal.
3.
Opto-electrical isolation separates output circuit logic and backplane circuits from field signals.
4.
The output driver turns the corresponding output on or off.
Backplane
Logic
Circuits
Opto-Electrical
Isolation
Logic
Circuits
Output
Drivers
Output
LED
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-22
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Your Output Modules
If your
Output
Circuit
LED is
On
And Your
Output Device is
On/Energized
And Probable Cause Recommended Action
Your program indicates that the output circuit is off or the output circuit will not turn off.
Programming problem.
Output is forced on in program.
Output circuit is damaged.
Off/De-energized Your output device will not turn on and the program indicates that it is on.
Low or no voltage across the load.
Incorrect wiring or open circuit.
Output device is incompatible.
Output circuit is damaged.
Check for duplicate outputs and addresses using the search function.
If using subroutines, outputs are left in their last state when not executing subroutines.
Use the force function to force output off. If this does not force the output off, output circuit is damaged. If the output does force off, then check again for logic/programming problem.
Check processor FORCED I/O or FORCE LED and remove forces.
Use the force function to force the output off. If this forces the output off, then there is a logic/programming problem.
If this does not force the output off, the output circuit is damaged. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Measure the source voltage and check specifications.
Check wiring and COMmon connections.
Check specifications and sink/source compatibility (if DC output).
Check wiring. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Troubleshooting
10-23
If your
Output
Circuit
LED is
Off
And Your
Output Device is
On/Energized
And Probable Cause Recommended Action
Your output device will not turn off and the program indicates that it is off.
Output device is incompatible.
Output circuit off-state leakage current may exceed output device specification.
Incorrect wiring.
Off/De-energized Your program indicates that the output circuit is on or the output circuit will not turn on.
Output device is shorted or damaged.
Output circuit is damaged.
Programming problem.
Output is forced off in program.
Output circuit is damaged.
Check specifications.
Check specifications. Use load resistor to bleed off leakage current. See output specifications.
Check wiring. Disconnect from SLC and verify device operation.
Verify device operation. Replace device.
Check wiring. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Check for duplicate outputs and addresses using search function.
If using subroutines, outputs are left in their last state when not executing subroutines.
Use the force function to force output on. If this does not force the output on, output circuit is damaged. If the output does force on, then check again for logic/programming problem.
Check processor FORCED I/O or FORCE LED and remove forces.
Use the force function to force the output on. If this forces the output on, then there is a logic/programming problem.
If this does not force the output on, the output circuit is damaged. Try other output circuit. Replace module.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10-24
Troubleshooting
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Chapter
11
Replacement Parts
This chapter provides a list of replacement parts and a list of replacement terminal blocks for your SLC 500 controller.
Replacement Cables and
Connectors
Description Catalog
Number
1746-C7 Chassis Interconnect Cable - The 1746-C7 is a 152.4 mm (6 in.) ribbon cable used when linking modular hardware style chassis up to 152.4 mm (6 in.) apart in an enclosure.
Chassis Interconnect Cable - The 1746-C9 is a 914.4 mm (36 in.) cable used when linking modular hardware style chassis from 152.4 mm (6 in.) up to 914.4 mm (36 in.) apart in an enclosure.
Chassis Interconnect Cable - The 1746-C16 is a 1.27m (50 in.) cable used when linking modular hardware style chassis from 0.914m (36 in.) up to 1.27m (50 in.) apart in an enclosure. This is the longest chassis interconnect cable recommended by Allen-Bradley.
1746-C9
1746-C16
32 Point Mating Connector - This connector is used for terminating a user-made cable. It is compatible with the
Catalog Number 1492-IFM40x, DIN RAIL mountable terminal block interface module (used with 32-point I/O modules).
Replacement Processor to Peripheral Programming/Communication Cable - This 1.8 m (6 ft) cable is used to connect the interface converter to the SLC 500 controller when using personal computer interface software. This cable is also used to connect the Hand-Held Terminal to the SLC 500 controller and to connect the Data Table Access Module to the
SLC 500 controller.
1746-N3
1747-C10
1747-C11 Replacement Processor to Isolated Link Coupler Cable - This 304.8 mm (12 in.) cable is used to connect the SLC 500 controller to the isolated link coupler.
Communication Module to Isolated Link Coupler Cable - This 914.4 mm (36 in.) cable is used to connect communication modules (i.e. 1746-BAS and 1747-KE) to the isolated link coupler. The isolated link coupler must be powered by an external power supply or connected to a device with a Catalog Number 1747-C10 or 1747-C11 cable.
Replacement Processor to Peripheral Programming/Communication Cable - This 6.096 m (20 ft) cable is used to connect the interface converter to the SLC 500 controller when using personal computer interface software. This cable is also used to connect the Hand-Held Terminal to the SLC 500 controller and to connect the Data Table Access
Module to the SLC 500 controller.
1747-C13
1747-C20
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 RS-232 Programmer Cable - This 3.96 m (12 ft) cable has two 9-pin DTE connectors and is used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to a personal computer serial port.
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 Communication Cable - This 45 cm (17.7 in.) cable has two 9-pin DTE connectors and is used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to port 1 of the 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter.
1747-CP3
1761-CBL-AC00
1761-CBL-PM02 SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 Communication Cable - This 2 m (6.5 in.) cable has a 9-pin DTE and an 8-pin mini DIN connector and is used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to port 2 of the 1761-NET-AIC
Advanced Interface Converter.
1761-CBL-AP00
1
SLC 5/03, 5/04, and 5/05 Communication Cable - This 45 cm (17.7 in.) cable has a 9-pin DTE and an 8-pin mini DIN connector and is used to connect the SLC processor RS-232 channel (channel 0) to port 2 of the 1761-NET-AIC
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
11-2
Replacement Parts
Description
RJ45 to 6-Pin Phoenix Connector Communication Cable - This 3 m (9.8 ft) cable is used to connect the SLC 500 fixed,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processor RJ45 port to port 3 of the 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter.
RJ45 to 6-Pin Phoenix Connector Communication Cable - This 9.5 m (31.2 ft) cable is used to connect the SLC 500 fixed,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, and SLC 5/03 processor RJ45 port to port 3 of the 1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter.
Catalog 1492 Pre-wired Interface Cables
Catalog
Number
1761-CBL-AS03
1761-CBL-AS09
1492
Cable Connectivity Summary
For Connectivity Between These Devices
1746-A4, -A7, -A10, or -A13 Chassis 1746-A4, -A7, -A10, or -A13 Chassis
Preferred Cable
Catalog Number
1746-C7
1746-C9
1746-C16
1747-C10 1747-PIC Personal Interface Converter
1747-PT1 Hand-Held Programming
Terminal
1747-DTAM-E Data Table Access Module
2707-Lxxx, -Vxxx DTAM Plus
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
SLC 500 Processors (DH-485 Channel)
SLC 500 Processors (DH-485 Channel) 1747-C11
1747-KE DH-485/RS-232C Interface
Module
1746-BAS BASIC Module
1746-xx32 32 Point I/O Modules
SLC 5/03 Processor (RS-232 Channel 0)
SLC 5/04 Processor (RS-232 Channel 0)
SLC 5/05 Processor (RS-232 Channel 0)
1746-I/O
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1492-IFM40x
Personal Computer Serial Port (9-Pin
DTE)
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1770-KF3 DH-485 Communication
Interface
1492-IFMxx Interface Modules
1747-SN Remote I/O Scanner
1747-DCM Direct Communication Module
1747-ASB SLC Remote I/O Adapter
Module
SLC 5/04 Processors (1747-L541, -542, and -543)
Remote I/O Network
1747-AIC Isolated Link Coupler
1747-C13
1492-CABLExH
1747-CP3
1492-CABLExx
Belden 9463
Belden 9842 or 3106A -
-
These Cables
May Be Used
1747-C11
1747-C20
-
-
-
-
1747-C10
1747-C13
1747-C20
1747-C11
1747-C10
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Replacement Parts
11-3
Replacement Terminal Blocks
Description Catalog
Number
1746-RT25B Replacement Terminal Block (Blue) — Used with DC I/O modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-IB16, -IC16, -IH16, -IV16,
-OBP8, -OB16, -OB16E, -OBP16, -OVP16 -OV16, -IN16, -IG16, -OG16
Replacement Terminal Block (Orange) — Used with relay output modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-OW16, -OX8
Replacement Terminal Block (Green) — Used with Specialty I/O modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-HSCE, -IO12, -NR4,
-NI8
1746-RT25C
1746-RT25G
Replacement Terminal Block (Red) — Used with AC I/O modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-IA16, -OA16, -IM16, -OAP12 1746-RT25R
Replacement Terminal Block — 2-position terminal block used with analog outputs, Catalog Numbers 1746-NO4I,
-NO4V
1746-RT26
1746-RT27 Replacement Terminal Block — 8-position terminal block used with analog outputs, Catalog Numbers 1746-NO4I,
-NO4V
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with analog input modules, Catalog Numbers 1746-NI4, -NIO4I, -NIO4V, -FIO4I,
-FIO4V
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with RIO Communication Modules, Catalog Numbers 1747-SN, -DSN, -DCM
1746-RT28
1746-RT29
1746-RT30 Replacement Terminal Block — 6-position DH-485 plug/connector; used with DH-485 Link Coupler, Catalog Number 1747-AIC and Advanced Interface Converter, Catalog Number
1761-NET-AIC
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with SLC 500 Remote I/O Adapter Module, Catalog Number 1747-ASB 1746-RT31
Replacement Terminal Block — Used with Thermocouple/mV Module, Catalog Number 1746-NT4
Replacement Terminal Block — 3-position DH+ connector; used with SLC 5/04 Processors, Catalog Numbers
1747-L541, 1747-L542, -L542P, 1747-L543
Replacement Terminal Block (Green) — Used with Thermocouple/mV Input Module, Catalog Number 1746-NT8
Replacement Terminal Block (Green) — Used with RTD/resistance Input Module, Catalog Number 1746-NR8
1746-RT32
1746-RT33
1746-RT34
1746-RT35
Other Replacement Hardware
Description
Replacement Fuses — Five fuses per package. Orders must be for multiples of five. (Price is per fuse.)
Catalog Number for 1746-P1 power supply.
Catalog Number for 1746-P2 power supply.
Catalog Number for 1746-P3 power supply.
Fixed I/O AC units, MDL 1.25 Ampere.
Fixed I/O DC units, MDL 1.6 Ampere.
Catalog Numbers for 1746-OBP16 and 1746-OVP16 output modules.
-
Catalog
Number
1746-F1
1746-F2
1746-F3
1746-F4
1746-F5
1746-F8
1746-F9 Catalog Numbers for 1746-OAP12 output module.
Modular Card Slot Fillers — Two fillers per package. Orders must be for multiples of two. (Price is per filler.)
Allen-Bradley PLCs
1746-N2
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
11-4
Replacement Parts
Description
Connector — Mating Connector for 32-point user-made cable
Catalog
Number
1746-N3
Kit consisting of 4 replacement terminal covers and labels for 4, 8, 16 I/O modules
Replacement Covers and Labels — Two covers per package. Orders must be for multiples of two covers. (Price is per cover.)
-
1746-R9
Catalog Number for 1746-P1.
Catalog Numbers for 1746-P2 and -P3 power supplies.
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 Processors.
Specialty I/O.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Processor.
Catalog Number for 1747-ASB.
Replacement Fuse Holder for Catalog Number 1746-OAP12. Two fuse holders per package. Orders must be for multiples of two. (Price is per holder.)
Replacement Retainer Clips — Four clips per package. Orders must be for multiples of four. (Price is per clip.)
Replacement Remote I/O Address Labels: Includes five labels for remote PLC system and five labels for remote SLC system.
Replacement Octal Label Kit — Kit includes one octal LED label and one door label.
for 1746-IA16.
for 1746-IB16.
for 1746-IG16.
-
1746-R10
1746-R11
1746-R12
1746-R13
1746-R14
1746-R16
1746-R17
1746-R15
1746-RL35
1746-RL40
1746-RL41
1746-RL42
for 1746-IM16.
for 1746-IN16.
for 1746-IV16.
for 1746-ITB16.
for 1746-ITV16.
for 1746-OA16.
for 1746-OB16.
for 1746-OG16.
for 1746-OV16.
for 1746-OW16.
for 1746-OBP16.
for 1746-OVP16.
for 1746-OAP12.
for 1746-IC16.
for 1746-IH16.
for 1746-IB32.
for 1746-IV32.
for 1746-OB32 and 1746-OB32E.
1746-RL57
1746-RL58
1746-RL59
1746-RL60
1746-RL61
1746-RL70
1746-RL43
1746-RL44
1746-RL45
1746-RL46
1746-RL47
1746-RL50
1746-RL51
1746-RL52
1746-RL53
1746-RL54
1746-RL55
1746-RL56
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Replacement Parts
11-5
Description
for 1746-OV32.
Catalog
Number
1746-RL71
for 1746-OB16E.
Lithium Battery Assembly. This is an optional part used for the SLC 500 Fixed and Modular Hardware Style processors and the Hand-Held Terminal. Refer to product documentation for proper storage and handling instructions. For disposal information, consult your nearest Rockwell Automation Sales Office.
1746-RL72
1747-BA
Replacement Keys for the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
Replacement Parts Kit for 20 I/O Fixed Hardware Style Processor, consists of: two Output Terminal Covers, two Input
Terminal Covers, two Prom/Battery Covers, and one HHT/Comm Connector Cover.
1747-KY1
1747-R5
Replacement Parts Kit for 30 & 40 I/O Fixed Hardware Style Processors, consists of: two Output Terminal Covers, two
Input Terminal Covers, two PROM/Battery Covers, and one HHT/Comm Connector Cover.
1747-R7
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
11-6
Replacement Parts
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
A
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
The information in this appendix will help you plan, install, and operate the SLC 500 in a DH-485 network. This chapter also contains information that describes the DH-485 network functions, network architecture, and performance characteristics. It also covers:
•
DH-485 network description
•
DH-485 network protocol
•
DH-485 token rotation
•
DH-485 network initialization
• devices that use the DH-485 network
•
1747-AIC isolated link coupler for DH-485
• example system configuration
(includes 1761-NET-AIC advanced interface converter)
• important planning considerations
• installing the DH-485 network
1
DH-485 Network
Description
The DH-485 network passes information between devices on the plant floor. The network monitors process parameters, device parameters, device status, process status and application programs to support data acquisition, data monitoring, program upload/download and supervisory control.
The DH-485 network offers:
• interconnection of 32 devices
• multi-master capability
• token passing access control
• the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network
• maximum network length of 1219 m (4000 ft)
(1)
The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH-485 network. The protocol supports two classes of devices: initiators and responders. All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers. To determine which initiator has the right to transmit, a token passing algorithm is used.
(1) The network can be extended to 2,438 meters (8,000 feet) by connecting two AIC+ Advanced Interface
Converters (1761-NET-AIC). Refer to the AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter User Manual, publication number
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-2
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
DH-485 Network Protocol
A node holding the token can send any valid packet onto the network. Each node is allowed only one transmission (plus two retries) each time it receives the token. After a node sends one message packet, it attempts to give the token to its successor by sending a “token pass” packet to its successor.
DH-485 Token Rotation
If no network activity occurs, the initiator sends the token pass packet again. After two retries (a total of three tries) the initiator will attempt to find a new successor.
IMPORTANT
The maximum address that the initiator will search for before wrapping to zero is the value in the configurable parameter “maximum node address.”
The default value for this parameter is 31 for all initiators and responders.
The allowable range of the node address of a initiator is 0 to 31. The allowable address range for all responders is 1 to 31. There must be at least one initiator on the network.
DH-485 Network
Initialization
Network initialization begins when a period of inactivity exceeding the time of a link dead timeout is detected by a initiator on the network. When the time for a link dead timeout is exceeded, usually the initiator with the lowest address claims the token. When a initiator has the token it will begin to build the network. The network requires at least one initiator to initialize it.
Building a network begins when the initiator that claimed the token tries to pass the token to the successor node. If the attempt to pass the token fails, or if the initiator has no established successor (for example, when it powers up), it begins a linear search for a successor starting with the node above it in the addressing.
When the initiator finds another active initiator, it passes the token to that node, which repeats the process until the token is passed all the way around the network to the first node. At this point, the network is in a state of normal operation.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Devices that Use the
DH-485 Network
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-3
Presently, the following SLC 500 devices support the DH-485 network:
•
SLC 500 Fixed I/O Controller (responder)
•
SLC 5/01 Modular I/O Controller (responder)
•
SLC 5/02 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
•
SLC 5/03 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
•
SLC 5/04 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
•
SLC 5/05 Modular I/O Controller (initiator/responder)
•
Personal computer running your programming software
(initiator)
•
Hand-Held Terminal (initiator)
•
DTAM (initiator/responder)
Other devices that use the DH-485 network include those in the table below.
Catalog Number Description
1746-BAS
1747-KE
1770-KF3
1785-KA5
2760-RB
Function Publication Installation
Requirement
SLC Chassis BASIC Module
DH-485/DF1
Interface Module
DH-485/DF1
Interface Module
DH+/DH485
Gateway
SLC Chassis
Standalone
(“desktop”)
(1771) PLC
Chassis
Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to third party devices. Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels (2 RS232 and 1 DH485) to printers, modems, or the DH-485 network for data collection.
Provides a non-isolated DH-485 interface for SLC
500 devices to host computers over RS-232 using full- or DF1 half-duplex protocol. Enables remote programming using your programming software to an SLC 500 processor or the DH-485 network through modems. Ideal for low cost RTU/SCADA applications.
1746-UM004A-US-P
1746-RM001A-US-P
1746-PM001A-US-P
1747-6.12
Provides an isolated DH-485 interface for SLC 500 devices to host computers over RS-232 using full- or
DF1 half-duplex protocol. Enables remote programming using your programming software to an SLC 500 processor or the DH-485 network through modems.
1770-6.5.18
Provides communication between stations on the
PLC-5 (DH+) and SLC 500 (DH-485) networks.
Enables communication and data transfer from PLC to SLC 500 on DH-485 network. Also enables programming software programming or data acquisition across DH+ to DH-485.
1785-6.5.5
1785-1.21
Flexible Interface
Module
(1771) PLC
Chassis
2760-ND001 Provides an interface for SLC 500 (using protocol cartridge 2760-SFC3) to other A-B PLCs and devices.
Three configurable channels are available to interface with Bar Code, Vision, RF, Datalinert, and
PLC systems.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-4
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Catalog Number Description
1784-KTX, -KTXD PC DH-485 Interface
Card
1784-PCMK PCMCIA Interface
Card
2707-L8P1, -L8P2,
-L40P1, -L40P2,
-V40P1, -V40P2,
-V40P2N,
-M232P3, and
-M485P3
DTAM Plus and
DTAM Micro
Operator Interfaces
2711-K5A2,
-B5A2, -K5A5,
-B5A5, -K5A1,
-B5A1, -K9A2,
-T9A2, -K9A5,
-T9A5, -K9A1, and
-T9A1
1784-PKTX,
-PKTXD
PanelView 550 and
PanelView 900
Operator Terminals
PC DH-485 Interface
Card
Installation
Requirement
ISA Bus
PCMCIA slot in computer
Panel Mount
Panel Mount
PCI Bus
Function
Provides DH485 or DH+ connection
Provides DH485 or DH+ connection
Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors.
Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors.
Provides DH-485 or DH+ connection
Publication
1784-6.5.22
1784-6.5.19
2707-800,
2707-803
2711-802, 2711-816
1784-6.5.27
1747-AIC Isolated Link
Coupler for DH-485
The isolated link coupler (1747-AIC) is used to connect SLC 500 family
devices to the DH-485 network (as shown on page A-5). The coupler
provides a 6-position removable terminal block for connection to the
DH-485 communication cable.
Network connections for SLC 500 processors are provided by the
Catalog Number 1747-C11, 304.8 mm (12 in.) cable supplied with the link coupler. Network connections for peripheral devices, such as the
Personal Interface Converter (1747-PIC), Data Table Access Module
(1747-DTAM-E), or Hand-Held Terminal (1747-PT1) are provided by the standard Catalog Number 1747-C10 1.8 m (6 ft) cable supplied with each of those devices. If you need to connect a peripheral device that is between 1.8 m (6 ft) and 6.1 m (20 ft) away, use the
1747-C20 cable.
To protect connected devices, the coupler provides 1500V dc isolation between the communications cable and the attached SLC 500 controller and peripheral devices (PIC, DTAM, or HHT).
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Programming
Software
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-5
The isolated link coupler can also be used to provide connectivity between a peripheral device (programming software and PIC, HHT, or
DTAM) for distances greater than 1.8 m (6 ft) up to a maximum of
1219 m (4000 ft). Below is an example of a “remote” connection between a computer running your programming software and an SLC
500 processor.
1747-PIC
PIC
1747-C10
1747-AIC
>1.8m (6 ft)
1747-AIC
+24V dc
1747-C20
1747-C11
Data Table
Access Module
1747-DTAM-E
Example System
Configuration
Below is an example of a DH-485 network.
1747-PIC
Interface
Converter
Allen-Bradley
1784-T45, -T47 or compatible laptop
SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05
Modular Controller
1761-NET-AIC
Advanced Interface
Converter
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
Isolated
Link
Coupler
DH-485 Network
max. length 1219m (4,000 ft)
1747-AIC
SLC 500 20-Point
Fixed Controller
Data Table
Access
Module
SLC 5/01 Modular Controller
SLC 500 20-Point Fixed
Controller with 2-Slot
Expansion Chassis
SLC 500
Hand-Held
Terminal
Personal Computer
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
SLC 500 Fixed Controller
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-6
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
DH-485
1747-AIC
Configuring the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 Channel 0 for
DH485
The RS-232 port (channel 0) of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processor can be configured for DH485 protocol. Refer to your programming software user manual for software configuration information.
You can connect channel 0 of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors to a DH485 network using the 1747-CP3 cable and a
1761-NET-AIC Advanced Interface Converter (AIC+). In this case, the
AIC+ must be powered with 24V dc. The 1746-P1, -P2, -P4, -P5, and
-P6 power supplies provide 24V dc user power which may be used to power the AIC+.
SLC 5/01 SLC 5/03 or 5/04
24V dc Power
Supply
1747-C11
1747-CP3
1761-NET-AIC
Personal Computer
APS
DH-485
RS-232
24V dc User Power
Connection
1761-NET-AIC
1747-CP3
24V dc User Power Connection
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Important Planning
Considerations
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-7
Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware. Listed below are some of the factors that can affect system performance:
• amount of electrical noise, temperature, and humidity in the network environment
• number of devices on the network
• connection and grounding quality in installation
• amount of communication traffic on the network
• type of process being controlled
• network configuration
The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections.
Hardware Considerations
You need to decide the length of the communication cable, where you will route it, and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed.
When the communication cable is installed, you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future. The following sections will help you understand and plan the network.
Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable
You must install a link coupler (1747-AIC) for each node on the network. If you plan to add nodes later, provide additional link couplers during the initial installation to avoid recabling after the network is in operation.
The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219m (4000 ft).
This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node on the network.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-8
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Planning Cable Routes
Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference:
•
Keep the communication cable at least 1.52 m (5 ft) from any electric motors, transformers, rectifiers, generators, arc welders, induction furnaces, or sources of microwave radiation.
•
If you must run the cable across power feed lines, run the cable at right angles to the lines.
•
If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.15 m (6 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.30 m (1 ft) from lines greater than 20A, but only up to 100k VA, and 0.60 m (2 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.
•
If you run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit, keep the communication cable at least 0.08 m (3 in.) from ac power lines of less than 20A, 0.15 m (6 in.) from lines greater than 20A, but only up to 100k VA, and 0.30 m (1 ft) from lines of 100k VA or more.
Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical interference. If you route the cable through conduit, follow these additional recommendations:
–
Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference. You can use aluminum conduit in non-critical areas.
–
Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit. Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector (use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire or wire braid) to hold both sections at the same potential.
–
Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground.
–
Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable.
–
Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit. The conduit should contain only serial communication cables.
–
Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications.
For more information on planning cable routes, see
Industrial
Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines
, Publication Number
1770-4.1.
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-9
Software Considerations
Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network. The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance:
• number of nodes on the network
• addresses of those nodes
• baud rate
• maximum node address selection
•
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 only
: token hold factor
• maximum number of communicating devices
The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance (speed).
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes. Unnecessary nodes (such as a second programming terminal that is not being used) slow the data transfer rate. The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32.
Setting Node Addresses
The best network performance occurs when node addresses start at 0 and are assigned in sequential order. SLC 500 processors default to node address 1. The node address is stored in the processor status file (S:15L). Processors cannot be node 0. Also, initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network.
Setting Processor Baud Rate
The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate. All devices must be at the same baud rate. The baud rate is stored in the processor status file (S:15H).
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-10
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Maximum Node Address Setting
The maximum node address parameter should be set as low as possible. This minimizes the amount of time used in soliciting successors when initializing the network. If all nodes are addressed in sequence from 0, and the maximum node address is equal to the address of the highest addressed node, the token rotation will improve by the amount of time required to transmit a solicit successor packet plus the slot timeout value.
Note that this does not allow any node to be added to the network without affecting the response time. On the other hand, since the time required to hold an open station address is greater than the time required to pass a token, it can be useful to leave a temporary device
(such as a personal computer) connected if there is only one such device. (A solicit successor packet requires the same transmission time as the token pass, but there is an added slot timeout period.)
See your programming software user manual or the
Hand-Held
Terminal User Manual
, Catalog Number 1747-NP002, for the procedures to set node addresses, processor baud rate, and maximum node addresses.
IMPORTANT
The SLC 500 Series A (only) processors set the maximum node address to 31 when power is cycled increasing initialization and response time of the network.
Maximum Number of Communicating Devices
SLC 500 fixed and SLC 5/01 processors can be selected by two initiators maximum at the same time. Using more than two initiators to select the same SLC 500 fixed and SLC 5/01 processors at the same time can cause communication timeouts.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Installing the DH-485
Network
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-11
To install a DH-485 network, you will need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable and terminators to the Isolated Link
Coupler.
Install the DH-485 network using the following tools (or equivalent):
Description Part Number Manufacturer
Shielded Twisted Pair Cable Belden #3106A or #9842 Belden
Stripping Tool 45-164 Ideal Industries
1/8 ” Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable
DH-485 Communication Cable and Isolated Link Coupler
The link coupler provides a connection for each node. The isolated link coupler electrically isolates the DH-485 communication interface from the processor and peripheral connections. Electrical-optical isolation is provided to 1500V.
The suggested DH-485 communication cable is Belden #3106A or
#9842 cable. The cable is jacketed and shielded with two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire.
One pair provides a balanced signal line, and one wire of the other pair is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network. The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on the network communication.
Installing the DH-485 Communication Cable
The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy-chained together. The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219m (4000 ft).
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-12
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Link Coupler
1747-AIC
When cutting cable segments, make them long enough to route them from one link coupler to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector. Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable.
Belden #3106A or #9842
Belden #3106A or #9842
Belden #3106A or #9842
Link Coupler
1747-AIC
Link Coupler
1747-AIC
DH-485
Peripheral
Connector
CPU
Power
DH-485
Peripheral
Connector
CPU
Power
DH-485
Peripheral
Connector
CPU
Power
IMPORTANT
A daisy-chained network is recommended as shown above. We do
not
recommend the following:
Belden #3106A or #9842 Belden #3106A or #9842 Belden #3106A or #9842
Connector Connector
Incorrect
Connector
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Connecting the Communication Cable to the Isolated Link Coupler
Attach the terminal block of the link coupler to the Belden #3106A or
#9842 cable as shown below. Additional terminal blocks are available
for replacement, see Chapter 11.
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-13
Single Cable Connection
Belden #3106A or #9842
Shrink Tubing
Recommended
Orange with White Stripes
White with Orange Stripes
Blue (#3106A) or Blue with
White Stripes (#9842)
Drain Wire
Multiple Cable Connection
to Successive Device to Previous Device
6 Termination
5 A
4 B
3 Common
2 Shield
1 Chassis
Ground
The table below shows wire/terminal connections for DH-485 connectors for Belden #3106A.
For this Wire/Pair
Shield/Drain
Blue
White/Orange
Connect this Wire
Non-jacketed
Blue
White with Orange Stripe
Orange with White Stripe
To this Terminal
Terminal 2 - Shield
Terminal 3 - (Common)
Terminal 4 - (Data B)
Terminal 5 - (Data A)
The table below shows wire/terminal connections for DH-485 connectors for Belden #9842.
For this Wire/Pair
Shield/Drain
Blue/White
White/Orange
Connect this Wire
Non-jacketed
White with Blue Stripe
Blue with White Stripe
White with Orange Stripe
Orange with White Stripe
To this Terminal
Terminal 2 - Shield
Cut back - no connection
(1)
Terminal 3 - (Common)
Terminal 4 - (Data B)
Terminal 5 - (Data A)
(1) To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable, cut back the white with blue stripe wire immediately after the the insulation jacket is removed. This wire is not used by DH-485.
IMPORTANT
In Series A 1747-AIC, terminal 5 was called DATA B and terminal 4 was called DATA A. In this case, use terminal numbers only and ignore signal names DATA
B and DATA A. The internal circuitry of the Series A is the same as Series B.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-14
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
4
3
2
6
5
1
Grounding and Terminating the DH-485 Network
Only one of the link couplers at the end of the link must have
Terminals 1 and 2 of the network connector jumpered together. This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable.
Link couplers at both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and
6 of the link connectors jumpered together. This connects the termination impedance (of 120
Ω
) that is built into each link coupler as required by the DH-485 specification. See the figure below for the proper jumpering.
End-of-Line Termination
Jumper
Jumper
Belden #9842 Cable
1219m (4,000 ft) maximum length
4
3
2
6
5
1
Jumper
Powering the Link Coupler
In normal operation with the programmable controller connected to the link coupler, the processor powers both the link coupler and peripheral device (DTAM, PIC, HHT) — if connected — through the
C11 cable.
If you do not connect the processor to the link coupler, then use a
24V dc power supply to power the link coupler and peripheral device. The 1747-AIC requires 85 mA at 24V dc. With a peripheral device connected, the total current required is 190 mA at 24V dc.
If both the processor and external power are connected to the link coupler, only the external source is used.
IMPORTANT
Always connect the CHS GND (chassis ground) terminal to the nearest earth ground. This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V dc supply is used.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-15
Below are three options for externally powering the 1747-AIC:
•
If the link coupler is to be installed in an office environment, you can use the wall mount power supply (1747-NP1) or global desktop power supply (1747-NP2). The link coupler would be powered through either the 1747-C10 cable or by hardwiring from the supply to the screw terminals on the link coupler.
•
If you use any of the following chassis power supplies (1746-P1,
1746-P2, 1746-P4, 1746-P5, and 1746-P6), you can use the 24V dc user power supply (200 mA maximum) built into the power supply. The link coupler would be powered through a hard-wired connection from the screw terminals on the power supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the link coupler.
•
You can use an external DC power supply with the following specifications:
–
operating voltage: 24V dc + 25%
–
output current: 190 mA
–
rated NEC
The link coupler would be powered through a hard-wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the link coupler.
ATTENTION
!
If you use an external power supply, it must be 24V dc. Permanent damage will result if miswired with wrong power source.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-16
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
The figure below shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the link coupler.
Left Side View
SLC 500
DH±485 LINK COUPLER
CAT SER
LISTED IND. CONT. EQ.
FOR HAZ. LOC. A196
OPERATING
TEMPERATURE
CODE T3C
CLASS 1, GROUPS A, B, C AND D, DIV. 2
EXTERNAL POWER REQUIREMENTS
24 VDC ± 25% A T 190 mA
N.E.C. CLASS 2
6
5
TERMINATION
A
4 B
3 COMMON
2 SHIELD
1 CHASSIS GROUND
CAUTION EXTERNAL POWER, IF USED, MUST BE 24VDC
PERMANENT DAMAGE TO CIRCUITRY WILL RESULT
IF MISWIRED WITH THE WRONG POWER SOURCE.
FAC 1P MADE IN U.S.A.
CHS
GND
DC
NEUT 24V dc
Bottom View
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
A-17
You can connect an unpowered link coupler to the DH-485 network without disrupting network activity. In addition, if an SLC 500 controller powers a link coupler that is connected to the DH-485 network, network activity will not be disrupted should the SLC 500 controller be removed from the link coupler.
Installing and Attaching the Link Couplers
1.
When installing the link coupler in an enclosure, use care so that the cable connecting the SLC 500 controller to the link coupler does not hit the enclosure door.
2.
Carefully plug the terminal block into the DH-485 port on the link coupler you are putting on the network. Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug.
3.
Provide strain relief for the cable after it is wired to the terminal block. This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wires.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
A-18
Setting Up the DH-485 Network
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
B
RS-232 Communication Interface
RS-232 and SCADA
Applications
This appendix provides an overview of the RS-232 communication interface and explains how the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors support it. This appendix also provides information on the following:
•
RS-232 and SCADA applications
•
RS-232 communication interface overview
•
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors and RS-232 communication
•
SLC 500 devices that support RS-232 communication
•
DF1 protocol and the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
•
ASCII communication
•
DF1 communication protocol modems overview
• wiring connectors for RS-232 communication
• applications for the RS-232 communication interface
For online configuration procedures of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors for DF1 protocol, see your programming software user manual.
RS-232 is a communication interface included under SCADA
(Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) applications. SCADA is a term that refers to control applications that require communication over long distances. For more information about the use of
Allen-Bradley equipment in SCADA applications, refer to the
SCADA
System Applications Guide,
publication number AG-6.5.8, and the
SCADA System Selection Guide
, publication number AG-2.1.
1
RS-232 Communication
Interface Overview
RS-232 is an Electronics Industries Association (EIA) standard that specifies the electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary communication.
One of the benefits of RS-232 communication is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system. The distance over which you are able to communicate with certain system devices is virtually limitless.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-2
RS-232 Communication Interface
The RS-232 channel on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors supports four protocols:
•
Full-Duplex DF1 (default)
•
Half-Duplex DF1 (SCADA)
•
DH-485
•
ASCII Communications
The SLC and PLC products detailed in this appendix that communicate over the RS-232 communication interface also use the DF1 serial communication protocol. DF1 protocol delimits messages, controls message flow, detects and signals errors, and retries after errors are detected.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 processors and RS-232
Communication
The SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can communicate by means of the RS-232 communication port, channel 0. Channel 0 supports DF1 full-duplex protocol and DF1 half-duplex master and slave protocol, DH485 protocol, as well as ASCII communications.
Refer to your programming software user manual for information on configuring the RS-232 communication port, channel 0.
The details of the DF1 protocols can be found in the
DF1 Protocol and
Command Set Reference Manual
, Publication Number 1770-6.5.16.
Channel 0 provides a minimum of 500V dc isolation between the I/O signals and the logic ground of the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors. The channel is a 9-pin D-shell. The table below provides a description of each of the pins.
5
6
7
8
9
2
3
Pin
1
4
Pin Name
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
RXD (Receive Data)
TXD (Transmit Data)
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
COM (Common Return [Signal Ground])
DSR (Data Set Ready)
RTS (Request to Send)
CTS (Clear to Send)
NC (No Connection)
The D-shell is the bottom port on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC
5/05 processors.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
SLC 500 Devices that
Support RS-232
Communication
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-3
The SLC 500 product line has three other modules, aside from the SLC
5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors, that support the RS-232 communication interface. They are the DH-485 Communication
Interface (1770-KF3), the BASIC module (1746-BAS), and the
DH-485/RS-232C Interface (1747-KE). All three of these modules can be used with either the SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processor.
1770-KF3 Module
The 1770-KF3 module links host computers with the Allen-Bradley
DH-485 Data Highway. The host computer communicates with the
1770-KF3 over an RS232 link using DF1 protocol. Through the
1770-KF3, the host computer can communicate with the nodes on the
DH-485 network.
For more information on the 1770-KF3 module, see the
DH-485
Communication Interface User Manual
, Catalog Number 1770-6.5.18.
1747-KE Module
The 1747-KE is a communication interface module that acts as a bridge between DH-485 networks and devices requiring DF1 protocol.
You can configure the DF1 port on the 1747-KE for RS-232/423,
RS-422, or RS-485 devices. Residing in an SLC 500 chassis, the
1747-KE is ideally used as an interface module, linking remote
DH-485 networks via a modem to a central host.
For more information on the 1747-KE module, see the
DH-485/RS-232
Interface Module User Manual
, Catalog Number 1747-6.12.
1746-BAS and 1746-BAS-T Modules
The 1746-BAS and 1746-BAS-T modules, which are programmed using the BASIC language, have two configurable serial ports for interfacing to computers, modems, serial printers, and other RS-232 compatible devices. You can also use them for off-loading complex math routines from an SLC 500 processor, thereby conserving ladder logic memory.
For more information on the 1746-BAS module, see the
SLC 500
BASIC and BASIC-T Module User Manual
, Catalog Number
1746-UM004A-US-P.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-4
RS-232 Communication Interface
DF1 Protocol and the SLC
5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors
DF1 protocol combines data transparency (ANSI — American National
Standards Institute — specification subcategory D1) and 2-way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses (F1). It is also a peer-to-peer, link-layer protocol. This means that system devices have equal access to messages being sent over the RS-232 communication interface.
DF1 protocol provides two modes of communication: full- and half-duplex.
DF1 Full-Duplex Protocol
DF1 full-duplex protocol (also referred to as DF1 point-to-point protocol) lets you use RS-232 point-to-point communication in applications that require it. This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions.
You can use channel 0 as a programming port, or as a peer-to-peer port using the MSG instruction.
In full-duplex mode, the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can send and receive messages. When the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors receive messages, they act as an end device, or final destination for the data packets
(1)
. The processor ignores the destination and source addresses received in the data packets.
However, the processor swaps these addresses in the reply that it transmits in response to any command data packet that it has received.
By setting a parameter with your programming software, you can also make the processor verify that the host computer can receive embedded responses. To do this, the processor waits to receive an embedded response from the host computer, before sending one of its own. A host computer that can send embedded responses should also be able to receive them.
If you use modems with DF1 full-duplex protocol, make sure that they are capable of simultaneous bi-directional communication. Typically, dial-up modems designed to be connected to standard telephone lines can support full-duplex.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
(1) The exception to this is the SLC 5/04 and SLC 5/05 that have the DH+ to DF1 or Ethernet to DF1 full-duplex passthru bit enabled. In the case of the SLC 5/04, the processor checks the destination address in the packet and if it does not match the configured DH+ address of the processor, the packet is forwarded onto the DH+ network to the destination address DH+ node. In the case of the SLC 5/05, the processor checks the destination address in the packet. If the routing table exists and an IP address is in the routing table for that
DF1 address, the packet is forwarded out to the Ethernet network to that IP address.
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-5
Full-Duplex (Point-to-Point)
Modem
SLC 5/03
(1747-L532)
1747-CP3
Modem
SLC 5/03
(1747-L532)
DF1 Half-Duplex Protocol
DF1 half-duplex protocol provides a multi-drop single master/multiple slave network. In contrast to the DF1 full-duplex protocol, communication takes place in one direction at a time. You can use channel 0 as a programming port, or as a peer-to-peer port using the
MSG instruction.
In half-duplex mode, the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can be either master or slave devices. As a master device, the processor polls each slave on the network on a regular and sequential basis. The master also supports routing of data packets from one slave to another, or slave-to-slave communication. As a slave device, the processor can send data packets when polled by the master device, which initiates all communication with slave devices.
If the master device has no data to send, it can still receive data from the slave device. To do this, the master sends out a poll packet addressed to the slave. If the slave has data to send, it does so in response to the poll packet. Otherwise, the slave sends a simple two-byte response, so that the master knows that it is active.
Several Allen-Bradley products support half-duplex master protocol.
They include the Enhanced PLC-5 processors, and SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors. WINtelligent Linx and RSLinx (2.0 or higher) from Rockwell Software, Inc. also support half-duplex master protocol.
DF1 Half-duplex supports up to 255 slave devices (addresses 0 to 254) with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts. The SLC 5/03, SLC
5/04, and SLC 5/05 support broadcast reception, but cannot initiate a broadcast command.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-6
RS-232 Communication Interface
Modem
Either half-duplex or full-duplex modem types can be used for the master, but half-duplex modems must be used for the slaves
(assuming there is more than one on a multi-drop network).
Personal Computer
Running RSLinx with DF1
Half-Duplex Protocol
(Master)
RS-232 (DF1 Protocol)
Modem
Modem Modem Modem
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/02 Processor and
1747-KE Interface Module
(Slave)
Modem
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor (Slave)
RS-232 (DF1 Protocol)
Modem
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/01 Processor and
1747-KE Interface Module
(Slave)
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor
(Master)
Modem
Modem
Fixed Controller with
1747-KE Interface Module
(Slave)
Modem
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/02 Processor and
1747-KE Interface Module
(Slave)
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor (Slave)
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/01 Processor and
1747-KE Interface Module
(Slave)
Fixed Controller with
1747-KE Interface Module
(Slave)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
ASCII Communication
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-7
ASCII protocol allows you to connect the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors to serial printers, PCs, and other third party devices. ASCII protocol allows your ladder program to manage ASCII data.
Modular Controller with
SLC 5/03 Processor
RS-232 Channel 0
1747-CP3
DF1 Communication
Protocol Modems Overview
You can connect the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors to several different types of modems. In all cases, the processors act as
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). DTE send and/or receive data on a network. Modem or line drivers act as Data Communication
Equipment (DCE), which provide the signal conversion and coding required for communication between DTE and data circuits. Other
DCE include phone-line modems and specialized modems, such as radio and satellite-link modems.
In addition to Common Return (COM), Receive Data (RXD), and
Transmit Data (TXD), the following active modem-control lines are provided on the SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors:
RTS (Request to Send) —
this output signal indicates to the modem or other DCE that the DTE wants to transmit.
CTS (Clear to Send) —
this input signal from the modem indicates the modem is ready to receive the transmission by the DTE for forwarding over a link.
DSR (Data Set Ready) —
this input signal indicates the DCE device is ready for operation. Loss of this signal causes a “modem-lost” condition in the processor.
DTR (Data Terminal Ready) —
this output signal from the DTE indicates that it is ready for operation. You can also use this signal with the processor to initiate DTR dialing in dial-up modems that support such a feature.
DCD (Data Carrier Detect) —
this is an input signal from the DCE that indicates a carrier signal is being received and that presumably
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-8
RS-232 Communication Interface
Wiring Connectors for
RS-232 Communication
To connect Allen-Bradley devices with other devices over RS-232, you must wire the cable connectors so that communication can occur through the cabling, which provide the interface between devices.
Types of RS-232 Connectors
The figures below show male connectors, and their pinout locations, for Allen-Bradley devices.
3
2
5
4
1
7
6
9
8
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
11
10
9
15
14
13
12
7
6
9
8
13
12
11
10
3
2
5
4
1
21
20
19
18
25
24
23
22
17
16
15
14
9-Pin Connector (Male) 15-Pin Connector (Male) 25-Pin Connector (Male)
DTE Pinout
Channel 0 is configured as DTE for all SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and
SLC 5/05 processors. The pinouts are the same as the 9-pin AT port.
6
7
8
9
4
5
2
3
DTE 9 Pinout
Pin
1
Description
DCD Data Carrier Detect
RXD Received Data
TXD Transmitted Data
DTR Data Terminal Ready
COM Common Return (Signal
Ground)
DSR Data Set Ready
RTS Request to Send
CTS Clear to Send
NC No Connection
Input
Output
Input
Input
Signal is Equivalent
DTE 15 Pinout
Equivalent
DTE 25 Pinout
Input
Input
Output
Output
Shared
8
3
2
11
7
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
6
4
5
22 (RI Ring
Indicator)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-9
DCE Pinout
Devices such as a modem are DCE. The pinouts on these terminals are wired to interface with DTE.
Signal is
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
DCE 9 Pinout
Pin Description
3
DCD Data Carrier Detect
RXD Received Data
TXD Transmitted Data
DTR Data Terminal Ready
COM Common Return (Signal Ground)
DSR Data Set Ready
RTS Request to Send
CTS Clear to Send
RI Ring Indicator
Input
Input
Output
Output
Shared
Input
Output
Input
Input
Equivalent DCE 25
Pinout
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
22
IMPORTANT
DCE signal names are viewed from a DTE perspective. For example, TXD is a DTE output and also a DCE input.
Pin Assignments for Wiring Connectors
Use the following pin assignments to wire the connectors of
Allen-Bradley control devices with modems and peripheral devices that support RS-232 communication. See the table below to find the wiring diagram that you need.
To Connect this
Device
IBM AT
To this Device
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05
Processors
Modem
Peripheral DTE
Modem
Peripheral DTE
IBM AT
Remarks
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Using a 1747-CP3 Cable
See this
Page
1747-KE Modem
Peripheral DTE
Modem
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
1746-BAS
Peripheral DTE Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-10
RS-232 Communication Interface
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1770-KF3
2760-RB
Modem
Modem
Peripheral DTE
1771-KGM (PLC-2) Modem
Peripheral DTE
1775-KA (PLC-3) Modem
Peripheral DTE
PLC-5 (Channel 0) Modem
Peripheral DTE
5130-RM
(PLC-5/250)
Modem
Peripheral DTE
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
Hardware Handshaking Enabled
Hardware Handshaking Disabled
IBM AT to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
25-Pin 9-Pin IBM AT
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
22
5
6
3
4
1
2
7
8
9
DTE
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
Modem 9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(1)
1
DCD 1 8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7
6
3
2
20
4
5
22
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
IBM AT to SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, 1770-KF3, 1775-KA,
1773-KA, 5130-RM or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
(1)
(2)
(2)
25-Pin 9-Pin
IBM AT
8
1 DCD
3
2 RXD
2
20
3
4
TXD
DTR
7
5 COM
6
6 DSR
7 RTS
4
5
22
8
9
DTE
CTS
RI
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
Modem 9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(3)
1
DCD 1 8
7
8
5
6
3
2
4
4
5
7
6
2
3
20
DCE
(2)
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-11
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor Connected to a Modem
(Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
9-Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DTE
RTS
CTS
NC
SLC
5/03
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
Modem 9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(1)
DCD 1
1
8
RXD 2
3
TXD
DTR
3
4
2
20
COM 5
7
DSR
RTS
6
CTS
RI
7
8
9
DCE
5
2
6
4
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor to another SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or
SLC 5/05, IBM AT, 1770-KF3, 1775-KA, 1773-KA, 5130-RM, or PLC-5
(Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
(1)
Peripheral
Device 9-Pin 25-Pin
(2)
9-Pin
1
SLC
5/03
DCD
GND
(3)
DCD 1
1
8
(2)
2 TXD
TXD 3 2
3
4
RXD
DTR
RXD
DTR
2
4
3
20
5
6
COM
DSR
COM
DSR
5 7
(2)
7
8
9
RTS
CTS
NC
RTS
CTS
6
7
8
DCE
6
4
5
(2)
DTE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-12
RS-232 Communication Interface
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor Connected to an IBM AT with a
1747-CP3 Cable
9-Pin SLC 5/03
1
DCD
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
DTR
5
COM
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
DTE
NC
TXD
RXD
DSR
COM
DTR
CTS
RTS
IBM AT
DCD
DCE
5
4
2
6
8
7
9-Pin
1
3
1747-KE to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
9-Pin 1747-KE
1
NC
2
RXD
3
4
TXD
DTR
5
COM
6
DSR
7
8
9
RTS
CTS
NC
DTE
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(1)
1
DSR
6 6
RXD
2 3
TXD
DTR
3
4
2
20
COM
5 7
DCR
RTS
CTS
RI
8
9
1
7
8
4
5
22
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-13
1747-KE to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT, 1770-KF3,
1775-KA, 1773-KA, 5130-RM, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
(1)
(2)
(2)
9-Pin 1747-KE
5
6
3
4
7
8
9
1
2
NC
RXD
RTS
CTS
NC
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
DTE
TXD
RXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
Peripheral
Device 9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(3)
1
DCD 1 8
3
2
4
5
6
7
8
DTE
2
3
20
7
6
4
5
(2)
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
1746-BAS to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
7
8
5
6
9
9-Pin
1746-BAS
1
NC
2
RXD
3
4
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
DTE
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin
25-Pin
GND
(1)
DSR
6
1
6
RXD
2 3
TXD
DTR
3
4
2
20
COM
DCD
RTS
CTS
RI
7
8
5
1
9
DCE
4
5
7
8
22
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-14
RS-232 Communication Interface
1746-BAS to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT, 1770-KF3,
1775-KA, 1773-KA, 5130-RM, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
(1)
(2)
(2)
5
6
7
8
9
9-Pin 1746-BAS
1
NC
2
3
4
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
DTE
Peripheral
Device 9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(3)
1
NC
1 8
TXD
3 2
RXD
2 3
DTR
4 20
COM
5 7
DSR
RTS
CTS
6
7
8
6
4
5
DTE
(2)
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
1770-KF3 to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
25-Pin 1770-KF3
8 DCD
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
DTE
22
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
DCE
Modem
GND
(1)
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM 5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
9-Pin 25-Pin
7
6
4
5
22
1
8
3
2
20
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-15
2760-RB to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
25-Pin 2760-RB
1
GND
(1)
2
TXD
3
4
RXD
RTS
5
CTS
6
7
DSR
COM
20
DTE
DTR
Modem
GND
(1)
DCD
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
COM
DTR
RI
9-Pin 25-Pin
1
2
7
8
1
3
6
5
4
3
4
5
8
2
6
7
20
22 9
DCE
(1) Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only. Leave the other end open.
2760-RB to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT, 1770-KF3,
1775-KA, 1773-KA, 5130-RM, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
(2)
(2)
25-Pin 2760-RB
1
GND (3)
2
3
TXD
RXD
4
RTS
5
CTS
6
DSR
7
COM
20
DTE
DTR
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
GND
(3)
DCD
RXD
TXD
Peripheral
Device
2
7
8
6
1
3
5
4
DTE
9-Pin 25-Pin
2
3
4
1
8
5
6
7
20
(2)
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only. Leave the other end open.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-16
RS-232 Communication Interface
1771-KGM to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
9-Pin 1771-KGM
3
4
1
2
GND
(1)
TXD
RXD
RTS
5 CTS
DSR
6
7
COM
8
DCD
11
DTE
DTR
DSR
COM
DCD
DTR
RI
Modem
GND
(1)
TXD
RXD
RT S
CTS
6
5
1
4
2
7
8
9-Pin
25-Pin
3
1
2
6
7
8
20
22
3
4
5
9
DCE
(1) Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only. Leave the other end open.
1771-KGM to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT,
1770-KF3, 1775-KA, 1773-KA, 5130-RM, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking
Disabled)
(1)
Peripheral
Device 9-Pin 25-Pin
15-Pin 1771-KGM
GND
(3)
1
(2)
(2)
1
GND
(3)
2
TXD
3
RXD
4
RTS
5
CTS
6
DSR
7
COM
8
DCD
11
DTE
DTR
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DTE
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
(2)
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect the shield of the cable to the GND pin on one end only. Leave the other end open.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-17
1775-KA to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
25-Pin 1775-KA
8 DCD
3
2
20
RXD
TXD
DTR
7
COM
6
4
DSR
RTS
5
22
DTE
CTS
NC
Modem
GND
(1)
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
5
6
3
4
7
8
9-Pin 25-Pin
1
2
1
8
3
7
6
2
20
4
5
22 9
DCE
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-18
RS-232 Communication Interface
1775-KA to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT, 1770-KF3,
1773-KA, 5130-RM, or PLC-5 (Hardware Handshaking Disabled)
(1)
(2)
(2)
25-Pin 1775-KA
8
DCD
3
RXD
TXD 2
20
7
DTR
COM
6
4
5
22
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
DTE
Peripheral
Device
GND
(3)
9-Pin 25-Pin
1
1 8
DCD
TXD 3 2
RXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
5
6
2
4
7
8
4
5
7
6
3
20
DTE
(2)
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
PLC-5 (Channel 0) to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
25-Pin PLC-5, CH0
8
3
2
20
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
7
COM
6
DSR
RTS 4
5
22
CTS
NC
DTE
Modem
GND
(1)
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
9-Pin 25-Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DCE
1
8
3
2
20
7
6
4
5
22
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-19
PLC-5 (Channel 0) to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT,
1770-KF3, 1773-KA, 5130-RM, PLC-5, 1747-KE, or 1746-BAS (Hardware
Handshaking Disabled)
(1)
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin 25-Pin
25-Pin PLC-5, CH0
GND
(3)
1
(2)
8
DCD
DCD
1 8
(2)
3
RXD TXD
3 2
(2)
2
TXD
20
DTR
7
COM
6
DSR
4
RTS
5
22
DTE
CTS
NC
RXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
2
4
5
6
7
8
DTE
3
20
7
6
4
5
(2)
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
5130-RM to a Modem (Hardware Handshaking Enabled)
25-Pin 5130-RM
8
DCD
3
RXD
2
20
TXD
DTR
7
COM
6
4
5
22
DSR
RTS
CTS
NC
DTE
Modem
GND
(1)
DCD
RXD
TXD
DTR
COM
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
7
8
9
DCE
2
3
4
5
6
9-Pin 25-Pin
1
1 8
7
6
4
5
22
3
2
20
(1) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-20
RS-232 Communication Interface
5130-RM to a SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 Processor, IBM AT, 1770-KF3,
1773-KA, 5130-RM, PLC-5, 1747-KE, or 1746-BAS (Hardware Handshaking
Disabled)
(1)
(2)
25-Pin 5130-RM
8
DCD
Peripheral
Device
9-Pin 25-Pin
GND
(3)
1
DCD
1 8 (2)
3
RXD
TXD
3 2
2
TXD
RXD
2 3
20
DTR
DTR
4 20
7
COM
COM
5 7
6
DSR
DSR
6 6
(2)
4
RTS
RTS
7 4
(2)
5
CTS CTS 8 5
22 NC
DTE DTE
(1) You can also use cable 1747-CP3.
(2) Jumpers are only needed if you cannot disable the hardware handshaking on the port.
(3) Connect to the shield of the cable.
Applications for the RS-232
Communication Interface
The figures below illustrate different applications for the RS-232 communication interface.
DF1 Full-Duplex Peer-to-Peer
Modem Modem
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
RS-232 Communication Interface
B-21
Half-Duplex with Slave-to-Slave Routing
IMPORTANT
The 1747-KE module does not support slave-to-slave transfers.
WINtelligent Linx or RSLinx
Running DF1 Half-Duplex
Protocol (Master)
Modem
Modem
SLC 5/03 Modular Controller SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
B-22
RS-232 Communication Interface
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
C
Setting Up the DH+ Network
This appendix provides an overview of the Data Highway Plus (DH
+
) communication protocol and explains how the SLC 5/04 processors support it. This appendix also provides information on the following:
•
DH
+
communication protocol overview
•
SLC 5/04 processor and DH
+
communication
• wiring connectors for DH
+
communication for SLC 5/04
• typical DH
+
network configuration
Data Highway Plus
Communication Protocol
Overview
Data Highway Plus implements peer-to-peer communication with a token-passing scheme to rotate link mastership among a maximum of
64 nodes. Since this method does not require polling, it helps provide time-efficient reliable data transport. The DH
+
features:
• remote programming of PLC-2, PLC-3, PLC-5 and SLC 500 processors on your network
• direct connections to PLC-5 processors and industrial programming terminals
• easy re-configuration and expansion if you want to add more nodes later
• a communication rate of 57.6K baud, 115.2K baud, or 230.4K baud
IMPORTANT
A programming device, such as an IBM-compatible
PC, using a 1784-KT Communication Interface module does not operate faster than 57.6K baud. The
1784-KTX, -KTXD, -PKTX, -PKTXD, and -PCMK can operate at all three communication rates.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
C-2
Setting Up the DH+ Network
The following table summarizes the type of termination resistor needed to communicate at the specified baud rate with the maximum cable length.
Termination Link Resistor
Value
Ω
150
150
82
Communication Rate
(Kbaud)
57.6
115
230.4
Maximum Cable Length m (ft)
3,048 (10,000)
1,542 (5,000)
762 (2,500)
SLC 5/04 Processors and
DH+ Communication
The SLC 5/04 processors let you operate DH
+
communication protocol by means of the DH
+
communication channel 1. The
SLC 5/04 processors also support DF1 full-duplex protocol, DF1 half-duplex master and slave protocol, ASCII, or DH-485 via its RS-232 port, channel 0. The 3-pin connector, provided with the SLC 5/04 processors, is for actual DH
+
communication and the 8-pin connector is for monitoring DH
+
communication.
DH+ Channel 1, 3-Pin
Pin
1
2
3
Pin Name
DH
+
Data Line 1
Shield
DH
+
Data Line 2
4
5
6
7
8
Pin
1
2
3
DH+ Channel 1, 8-Pin
Pin Name
DH
+
Data Line 2
No Connection
Shield
No Connection
No Connection
DH
+
Data Line 1
No Connection
No Connection
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Setting Up the DH+ Network
C-3
The location of channel 1 is detailed in the drawing below.
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
FORCE
DH+
RS232
RUN REM PROG
DH+
Channel 1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
C-4
Setting Up the DH+ Network
Wiring Connectors for DH+
Communication for SLC 5/04
Processors
To connect Allen-Bradley devices with other devices over DH
+
, you must wire the 3-pin cable connectors so that communication can occur through the cabling. Each device requires its own node address.
PROG
R
E
M
RUN
BATT
PROC
FORCE
COMM
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
RUN
FORCE
DH+
RS232
REM PROG
1
2
Clear
Shield
Blue
A B
Terminating
Resistor
Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
1
2
PLC±5/20
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Terminating
Resistor Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
RUN
FORCE
DH+
RS232
REM PROG
1
2
Belden #9463
Belden #9463
Terminate the DH+ link on both ends by connecting a 150
Ω
, 1/2W resistor between terminals 1 and 2 of the 3-pin connector when you are communicating at 57.6K baud with a PLC-5 processor or 115.2K baud with other SLC 5/04 processors. Use an 82
Ω
, 1/2W resistor if you are communicating at 230.4K baud with other SLC 5/04 processors or Series E enhanced PLC-5 processor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Setting Up the DH+ Network
C-5
Minimizing Noise
To minimize the affect of noise on the SLC 5/04 processor, ground the cable shields to earth via 0.01
µ
F capacitors as shown in the DH+ wiring example below. Only directly ground the shield at one point on the network.
PROG
R
E
M
RUN
BATT
PROC
FORCE
COMM
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
RUN
FORCE
DH+
RS232
REM PROG
Earth Ground
1
2
Clear
Shield
Blue
Connector
Shield
(1)
Earth Ground
Terminating
Resistor
0.01
µ
F
Shield
A B
Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
1
2
PLC±5/20
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Terminating
Resistor
Connector
Clear
Shield
Blue
Shield
0.01
µ
F
SLC 5/04 CPU
RUN
FLT
BATT
RUN
FORCE
DH+
RS232
REM PROG
1
2
Earth Ground
Belden #9463
(1) To chassis ground directly at one point only in the network.
Belden #9463
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
C-6
Setting Up the DH+ Network
Typical DH+ Network
Configuration
The following figure illustrates a possible configuration for the SLC
5/04 processor on a DH
+
network. You can also use an SLC 500, SLC
5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, or SLC 5/05 processor in place of the SLC
5/04 on the DH
+
network if the 1785-KA5 card is used with a PLC-5.
PC with 1784-KTX, 1784-KTXD,
1784-PKTX, or 1784-PKTXD
APS
PLC-5/15
DH+ Network
SLC 5/04 Modular
Controller
1747-NET-AIC
Interface
Converter
The PLC-5 and
1785-KA5 are daisy chained together.
PLC-5/15 with a 1785-KA5
1747-AIC
1747-AIC
1747-AIC 1747-AIC
SLC 5/02 Modular Controller SLC 5/03 Modular Controller
The DH
+
protocol uses factory set timeouts to restart token-passing communication if the token is lost because of a defective node.
Other devices that use the DH+ network include those in the table below.
Catalog Number
1784-KTX, -KTXD
1784-PCMK
Description
PC DH+ Interface Card
Installation Requirement
ISA Bus
PCMCIA Interface Card PCMCIA slot in computer
1784-PKTX, -PKTXD PC DH+ Interface Card PCI Bus
Function
Provides DH+ or DH-485 connection
Provides DH+ or DH-485 connection
Provides DH+ or DH-485 connection
Publication
1784-6.5.22
1784-6.5.19
1784-6.5.27
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
D
Control Networks
This appendix provides a brief introduction about control networks.
For more information on using control networks, see the following publications:
Control Network Publication
Remote I/O
Publication
Number
Direct Communication Module User Manual 1747-6.8
RIO Scanner User Manual 1747-6.6
DeviceNet DeviceNet Scanner Configuration Manual
DeviceNet Interface User Manual
1747-6.5.5
1761-6.5
ControlNet SLC ControlNet Scanner Reference Manual 1747-RM623C-EN-P
SLC 500 ControlNet RS-232 Interface Module
User Manual
1747-5.34
The Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Network is a master/slave control network that enables chassis of I/O, operator interface terminals, push-button panels, I/O blocks, message displays, drives, etc., to be great distances from the host PLC processor. The SLC 500 fixed, SLC
5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 can interface to this network through the 1747-DCM module for distributed control. The
DCM allows the SLC 500 to look like another slave device on the network.
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O
Network
PLC-5 or SLC 5/02 and higher processors with 1747-SN scanner
Below is an example of the Allen-Bradley Remote I/O Network.
SLC Fixed
Controller
1747-DCM
SLC 5/01
1747-DCM
SLC 5/03
1747-DCM
1
1771 Remote I/O Network
PanelView Operator Terminal
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
D-2
Control Networks
With an SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, or SLC 5/05 processor, a
1747-SN Remote I/O Scanner can be used as the master of a remote
I/O network.
1747-SN
1771 Remote I/O Network
Block I/O
1747-ASB 1747-ASB
PanelView Operator Terminal
Each 1747-SN Scanner supports 4 logical racks of 256 I/O each per logical rack. If large amounts of data need to be transferred to a device such as a PanelView Operator Interface, the 1747-SN Series B
Scanner supports block transfer of up to 64 words of data. Up to 16 devices can be connected to a single remote I/O network. The SLC system supports multiple 1747-SN scanners if more devices are required to be controlled by a single SLC processor.
Remote I/O Passthru
Remote I/O passthru allows you to communicate between a personal computer on the same network as a SLC 5/03, 5/04, or 5/05 processor to devices on the Remote I/O Network. For example, a personal computer running PanelBuilder32 Software and communicating on the DH+ network could upload and download applications from a
PanelView Operator Terminal communicating on the Remote I/O network. This feature eliminates the need to physically connect the personal computer to the PanelView Operator Terminal when you need to change the application. This capability is available on the
1747-SN Series B Scanner, and the 1747-BSN Backup Scanner.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Control Networks
D-3
PC running
PanelView Software
SLC 5/04
DH+ Network
1747-SN, Series B
1771 Remote I/O Network
Block I/O
PanelView Operator Terminal
SLC 5/02
1747-DCM
TIP
The SLC 5/03 OS302 or later, SLC 5/04 OS401 or later, and SLC 5/05 support remote I/O passthru via both their communication ports.
DeviceNet Network
A DeviceNet network connects plant floor devices directly to the control system (e.g., SLC 500 controller) reducing the number of I/O interfaces and wiring associated with a typical hard-wired solution.
The DeviceNet communication network is a completely open device network and has the support of industry’s leading sensor, actuator, and control manufacturers.
The 1747-SDN DeviceNet Scanner
In a typical configuration, the 1747-SDN DeviceNet Scanner acts as an interface between DeviceNet devices and the SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC
5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors. The scanner communicates with
DeviceNet devices over the network to:
• read inputs from a device
• write outputs to a device
• download configuration data
• monitor a device’s operational status
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
D-4
Control Networks
The scanner communicates with the SLC 500 processors to exchange
I/O data. Information exchanged includes:
• device I/O data
• status information
• configuration data
A single scanner (master) can communicate with up to 63 nodes
(slaves) on DeviceNet. The SLC system supports multiple scanners if more devices are required to be controlled by a single SLC 500 processor.
1747-SDN Scanner
SLC 5/02 or higher processor
1770-KFD
RS-232 cable
PC with
RSNetworx for
DeviceNet
DeviceNet Network
RediSTATION
1305 Drive
Flex I/O
DeviceNet
Devices
The 1761-NET-DNI DeviceNet Interface
The DeviceNet Interface (DNI) is an intelligent DeviceNet to DF1 protocol conversion device that allows existing DF1 devices to communcate on DeviceNet. The DF1 device is able to exchange I/O data with a master device and is able to initiate and receive DF1 encapsulated DeviceNet messages across DeviceNet.
The DNI provides a single DeviceNet connection point and a single
RS-232 connection. The DeviceNet port is isolated from the DNI digital logic and RS-232 port.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Control Networks
D-5
The primary functions of the DNI are:
• to collect and receive input data from the DF1 device connected on its RS-232 port and forward that data to a connected master on DeviceNet
• to monitor output data received from the DeviceNet master and write that data to the DF1 device
• to allow DF1 devices to send and receive messages across the
DeviceNet network
The DNI can be used to interconnect:
•
MicroLogix™ controllers
•
PLC-5
®
programmable controllers
• operator interface devices
•
SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors
SLC 5/03 or higher processor
PC with RSLogix500 and/or
DeviceNet Manager
Node 3
KFD
1747-SDN Scanner
Master/Slave I/O
Peer-to-Peer Messaging
DeviceNet Network
DNI Module
Node 1
Node 2
MicroLogix Controller
DeviceNet Network Length
The DeviceNet network lengths are listed below.
Network Length
100 m (328.08 ft)
200 m (656.16 ft)
500 m (1640.42 ft)
Baud Rate
500K baud
250K baud
125K baud
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
D-6
Control Networks
ControlNet Network
ControlNet systems are designed to:
• provide high-speed, repeatable, deterministic I/O transmission
• allow control and message information to co-exist on the same physical media
• make sure that I/O data transfers are not affected by programming terminal activity or interscanner message activity on the network
The 1747-SCNR ControlNet Scanner Module
The 1747-SCNR Scanner provides the capability for SLC processors to produce or consume scheduled I/O to and from a ControlNet network. Scheduled messaging allows the SLC processor program to control I/O events in real time over ControlNet. The module connects to a ControlNet network via the standard BNC conectors.
The 1747-KFC15 ControlNet Messaging Module
The 1747-KFC15 module provides the capability for SLC 5/03 and higher processors to send or receive unscheduled ControlNet messages. With unscheduled messages, the SLC processor program can send peer-to-peer messages or be accessed and edited over the
ControlNet network using RSLogix 500™.
The 1747-KFC15 connects to the ControlNet network via the standard
BNC connectors and links to the SLC processor via a standard RS-232 cable. Other programming interfaces can connect to the ControlNet network through the 1747-KFC15 module’s network access port.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
E
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet
Network
This appendix:
• describes SLC 5/05 processors and Ethernet communication
• describes SLC 5/05 performance considerations
• describes Ethernet network connections and media
• explains how the SLC 5/05 establishes node connections
• lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures
• describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways
SLC 5/05 Processors and
Ethernet Communication
Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps. The physical communication media options for the SLC 5/05 are:
• built-in
–
twisted-pair (10Base-T)
• with media converters or hubs
–
fiber optic
–
broadband
–
thick-wire coaxial cable (10Base-5)
–
thin-wire coaxial cable (10Base-2)
See the following page for more information on Ethernet physical media.
1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-2
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
The SLC 5/05 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below.
SLC 5/05 CPU
RUN
FLT
FORCE
ENET
BATT
RUN REM
RS232
PROG
Channel 1
Ethernet
(10Base-T)
Channel 0
RS-232
(DH485, DF1, or ASCII)
SLC 5/05 Performance
Considerations
Actual performance of an SLC 5/05 processor varies according to:
• size of Ethernet messages
• frequency of Ethernet messages
• network loading
• the implementation of and performance of your processor application program
Optimal Performance: PC to SLC 5/05 Processor (2-node Ethernet network)
Operation Words MSG per Second ms per
MSG
Single Typed Read
1
Single Typed Reads
20
Single Typed Reads
100
140
138
129
281
287
312
Words per Second
140
2760
12,900
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-3
SLC 5/05 and PC
Connections to the Ethernet
Network
The SLC 5/05 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO/IEC 8802-3 STD
802.3 and utilizes 10Base-T media. Connections are made directly from the SLC 5/05 to an Ethernet hub. The network setup is simple and cost effective. Typical network topology is pictured below.
Ethernet Network Topology
Ethernet Hub
RJ45 connectors on both ends of cable (10Base-T) to PC Ethernet Card to SLC 5/05 Channel 1
IMPORTANT
The SLC 5/05 processor contains a 10Base-T, RJ45
Ethernet connector which connects to standard
Ethernet hubs via 8-wire twisted-pair straight-through cable. To access other Ethernet meduims, use
10Base-T media converters or Ethernet hubs that can be connected together via fiber, thin-wire, or thick-wire coaxial cables, or any other physical media commercially available with Ethernet hubs.
Ethernet Channel 1 8-Pin 10Base-T Connector
The Ethernet connector is an RJ45, 10Base-T connector. The pin-out for the connector is shown below:
6
7
4
5
8
2
3
Pin
1
Pin Name
TD+
TD-
RD+ not used by 10BASE-T not used by 10BASE-T
RDnot used by 10BASE-T not used by 10BASE-T
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-4
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
When to use straight-through and cross-over pin-out:
•
SLC 5/05 Ethernet port to 10Base-T Ethernet hub cables utilize a straight-through pin-out (1-1, 2-2, 3-3, 6-6).
•
Direct point-to-point 10Base-T cables connecting the SLC 5/05
Ethernet port directly to another SLC 5/05 Ethernet port (or a computer 10Base-T port) require a cross-over pin-out (1-3, 2-6,
3-1, 6-2).
Cables
Shielded and non-shielded twisted-pair 10Base-T cables with RJ45 connectors are supported. The maximum cable length between an
SLC 5/05 Ethernet port and a 10Base-T port on an Ethernet hub
(without repeaters or fiber) is 100 meters (323 feet). However, in an industrial application, cable length should be kept to a minimum.
Ethernet Connections
TCP/IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages. On top of TCP, the Client/Server Protocol is required to establish sessions and to send the MSG commands. Connections can be initiated by either a client program (INTERCHANGE or RSLinx application) or a processor.
The client program or processor must first establish a connection to the SLC 5/05 to enable the SLC 5/05 to receive solicited messages from a client program or another processor.
In order to
send
an outgoing message, the SLC 5/05 must first establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network. A connection is established when a
MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists.
When a MSG instruction executes, the SLC 5/05 checks to see whether a connection has been established with the destination node. If a connection has not been established, the SLC 5/05 attempts to establish a connection of the peer type.
In order to
receive
messages from another device on Ethernet, an
“incoming” connection must be established. This incoming connection is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection in the receiving processor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-5
The SLC 5/05 supports a maximum of 16 connections, allowing simultaneous communication with up to 16 other devices or applications. The connections are dedicated as follows:
Number of Connections
(1)
4
4
8 or 16
(2)
Dedicated to:
outgoing connections incoming connections either incoming or outgoing connections
(1) Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client, RSLinx client, and peers are all included when counting the number of connections.
(2) 1747-L522, -L553 processors with OS501, Series C, FRN 5 or higher only.
IMPORTANT
For outgoing connections, no more that one connection per destination node is established. If multiple MSG instructions use the same destination node, they share the same connection.
Configuring the Ethernet
Channel on the SLC 5/05
There are two ways to configure the SLC 5/05 Ethernet channel 1.
The configuration can be done via a BOOTP request at processor powerup, or by manually setting the configuration parameters using
RSLogix 500 Programming Software. The configuration parameters are shown below and the configuration procedures follow.
Parameter
Diagnostic File
Number
MSG
Connection
Timeout
MSG Reply
Timeout
Inactivity
Timeout
IP Address
Description
The file number of the diagnostic counter for this channel. A Diagnostic File Number value of zero means that no diagnostics file has been configured for this channel. The Diagnostic
File Number must be an integer within the limits of 7, 9-255.
The amount of time (in ms) allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with the destination node. The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from
250 to 65,500.
Default
0
Status
read/write
15,000 ms read/write
The amount of time (in ms) that the SLC 5/05 will wait for a reply to a command that it has initiated via a MSG instruction. The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 to 65,500.
The amount of time (in minutes) that a MSG connection may remain inactive before it is terminated. The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 to 65,500 minutes.
The SLC 5/05 internet address (in network byte order). The internet address must be specified to connect to the TCP/IP network.
3,000 ms
30 minutes
0
(undefined) read/write read/write read/write
Subnet Mask The SLC 5/05 subnet mask (in network byte order). The Subnet Mask is used to interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets. A Subnet Mask of all zeros indicates that no subnet mask has been configured.
0 read/write
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-6
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Parameter
Gateway
Address
Description
The address of a gateway (in network byte order) that provides connection to another IP network. A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured.
BOOTP Enable The BOOTP enable switch. When BOOTP is enabled, the SLC 5/05 attempts to learn its network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request. There must be a BOOTP server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request. When BOOTP is disabled, the SLC 5/05 uses the locally configured network related parameters (IP Address,
Subnet Mask, Broadcast Address, etc.).
Hardware
Address
The SLC 5/05 Ethernet hardware address.
Default
0
Status
read/write
1 (enabled) read/write
Ethernet hardware address read only
Configuration Using
RSLogix 500 Programming
Software
Refer to the documentation provided with your programming software.
Configuration Via BOOTP
BOOTP is a standard protocol that TCP/IP nodes use to obtain start-up information. By default, the SLC 5/05 broadcasts BOOTP requests at powerup. The BOOTP Valid parameter remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received. BOOTP lets you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link.
To use BOOTP, a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet subnet. The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software installed and reads a text file containing network information for individual nodes on the network.
The BOOTP request can be disabled by clearing the BOOTP Enable parameter in the channel Configuration File. When BOOTP Enable is cleared (disabled), the SLC 5/05 uses the existing channel configuration data.
IMPORTANT
If BOOTP is disabled, or no BOOTP server exists on the network, you must use SLC 500 programming software to enter/change the IP address for each processor.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-7
The host system’s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to service requests from SLC 5/05 processors. The following parameters must be configured:
Parameter
IP Address
Description
A unique IP Address for the SLC 5/05 processor.
Subnet Mask Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting
RFC 950, Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure.
Gateway Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the
SLC 5/05 that provides connections to another IP network.
TIP
You can use any commercially available BOOTP server. If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities on your network, and you want to dynamically configure Channel 1, you can download a free
Allen-Bradley BOOTP server from the Rockwell
Automation website. Go to
www.ab.com
, select product support and search for the BOOTP server.
When BOOTP is enabled, the following events occur at power-up:
•
The processor broadcasts a BOOTP-request message containing its hardware address over the local network or subnet.
•
The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the addresses in its look-up table in the BOOTPTAB file.
•
The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with the IP address and other network information that corresponds to the hardware address it received.
With all hardware and IP addresses in one location, you can easily change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network needs changing.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-8
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Using DOS/Windows BOOTP
The optional BOOTP Server diskette contains DOS-based and
Windows-based BOOTP server utilities. Both provide BOOTP services for SLC 5/05 processors. Regardless of the platform you are using, you must:
• install the boot-server utility
• edit the boot-server configuration file
• run the boot-server utility
IMPORTANT
Do not use the BOOTP utility disk if you already have INTERCHANGE software installed. Instead, use the boot-server capabilities that came with your
INTERCHANGE software.
Install the DOS/Windows BOOTP server
To install the DOS BOOTP server:
1.
Put the utility disk that came with your processor in your disk drive.
2.
Change directory to the disk drive.
3.
Type install, and press Enter.
4.
The software is installed in C:\ABIC\BIN. Put this directory in the path statement of your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
Edit the DOS/Windows BOOTP Configuration File
The boot-server configuration file, BOOTPTAB, is located in the
C:\ABIC\BIN directory. This file contains the information needed to boot SLC 5/05 processors.
You must edit the BOOTPTAB file, which is an ASCII text file, to include the name, IP address, and hardware address for each SLC 5/05 processor you want the server to boot. To edit this file:
1.
Open the BOOTPTAB file using a text editor.
The file contains lines that look like this:
#Default string for each type of Ethernet client defaults5E: ht=1:vm=rfc1048
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-9
These are the default parameters for SLC 5/05 processors and must always precede the client lines in the BOOTPTAB file.
The file also contains a line that looks like this: plc5name: tc-defaults5E:ip=aa.bb.cc.dd:ha=0000BC1Dxxyy
IMPORTANT
Use this line as the configuration template for
SLC 5/05 processors.
2.
Make one copy of the SLC 5/05 processor template for every
SLC 5/05 processor in your system.
3.
Edit each copy of the template as follows: a. Replace plc5name with the name of the SLC 5/05 processor.
Use only letters and numbers; do not use underscores.
b. Replace aa.bb.cc.dd with the IP address to be assigned to the processor.
c. Replace xxyy with the last four digits of the hardware address. Use only valid hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F); do not use the hyphens that separate the numbers. (You will find the hardware address on a label affixed to the printed circuit board of the SLC 5/05 processor.
TIP
See page 5-13 for an illustration showing the location
of the hardware address.
4.
Save, close, and make a backup copy of this file.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-10
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
Example
In this example there are three SLC 5/05 processors and an HP 9000 programming terminal. The names and hardware addresses are device specific:
Device
SLC 5/05
SLC 5/05
SLC 5/05
Name
sigma1 sigma2 sigma3
IP Address
12.34.56.1
12.34.56.2
12.34.56.3
Hardware Address
00-BC-1D-12-34
00-BC-1D-56-78
00-BC-1D-90-12
BOOTP Server
802.3 Ethernet (TCP/IP)
HP 9000
HP UNIX Computer sigma1
SLC 5/05 Processor sigma2
SLC 5/05 Processor sigma3
SLC 5/05 Processor
file looks like: Based on this configuration, the
#Legend:gw -- gateways
#ha -- hardware address
#ht -- hardware type
(1)
#ip -- host IP address
#sm -- subnet mask
#vm -- BOOTP vendor extensions format
(2)
#tc -- template host
#Default string for each type of Ethernet client defaults5E: ht=1:vm=rfc1048
#Entries for SLC 5/05 processors: sigma1: tc=defaults5E:ip=12.34.56.1:ha=0000BC1D1234 sigma2: tc=defaults5E:ip=12.34.56.2:ha=0000BC1D5678 sigma3: tc=defaults5E:ip=12.34.56.3:ha=0000BC1D9012
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
(1) 1 = 10 MB Ethernet
(2) Use rfc 1048.
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-11
Run the Boot Server Utility
You can run either the DOS-based utility or the Windows-based
BOOTP utility, but not both.
If you have BOOTP enabled and the message “BOOTP response not received” appears, check the cabling connections and the BOOTP server system.
If you’re using this platform
DOS-based
Windows
then invoke this executable
DTLBOOTD.EXE
DTLBOOTW.EXE
from the
DOS command line (specify optional parameters if necessary)
Windows Program Manager
See page
Both utilities are located in the C:\ABIC\BIN directory and use the information contained in the BOOTPTAB file.
Be sure to place the BOOTPTAB file in the directory from which you are running the BOOTP utility. If this file is not found in that directory, the utility will try to find the file in the directory specified by the environment variable ABIC_CONFIG.
Running the DOS-Based Utility
To run the boot-server utility, DTLBOOTD.EXE, follow these steps:
1.
At the DOS prompt, type:
DTLBOOTD
[
-D
] [
-T
<timeout>
] [
-B
<numboots>
] [
-F
<numfiles>
]
[
configfile
] [
logfile
]
Parameter
-F <numfiles> configfile logfile
Description
-D
-T <timeout> provide additional information for debug purposes.
exit after <timeout> seconds of inactivity.
-B <numboots> exit after answering <numboots> number of boot requests.
exit after answering <numfiles> number of file requests.
name of the boot server configuration file to use. The default configuration file is %ABIC_CONFIG%\BOOTPTAB.
name of the log file to use. The default log file is
%ABIC_CONFIG%\DTLBOOTD.LOG.
Once you invoke the utility, it runs until the specified exit parameter is satisfied. Exit any time by pressing [Esc].
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-12
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
2.
Apply power to all chassis containing SLC 5/05 processors.
At power-up, each SLC 5/05 processor broadcasts a request if BOOTP was enabled at the channel 1 configuration screen. The Ethernet boot server compares the hardware address with those listed in BOOTPTAB and responds by sending the corresponding IP address and other configuration data to the client via a
BOOTP reply.
Running the Windows-Based Utility
To run the boot-server utility, , follow these steps:
1.
Start Microsoft Windows
®
, if it is not already running.
2.
Open the Program Manager window, if it is not already open.
3.
Choose File on the menu bar and select Run from the menu.
4.
In the dialog box, type C:\ABIC\BIN\DTLBOOTW; then, choose OK or press [Enter].
Once you invoke the utility, it will run until you terminate it by closing the DTLBOOTW.EXE window and exiting from
Windows.
5.
Apply power to all chassis containing and SLC 5/05 processors.
At power-up, each SLC 5/05 processor broadcasts a BOOTP request. The Ethernet boot server compares the hardware address with those listed in BOOTPTAB and responds by sending the corresponding IP address and other configuration data to the client via a BOOTP reply.
Using Subnet Masks and
Gateways
Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 configuration screen.
IMPORTANT
If BOOTP is enabled, you can’t change any of the advanced Ethernet communications characteristics.
If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers, you must indicate the following information when configuring channel 1:
• subnet mask
• gateway address
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-13
A
subnet mask
is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet. If an address is located on another subnetwork, messages are routed through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination subnetwork.
If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask field at the default.
If you are Then
manually configuring channel
1 and have a network with subnets using BOOTP to configure channel 1 and have a network with subnets
• be sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled
• use your programming software to enter the subnet mask and gateway address.
• be sure BOOTP is enabled
• configure the BOOTPTAB file to include the subnet mask(s) and gateway address(es)
See page
Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Processors on Subnets
If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a processor located on a subnet, deselect the “BOOTP Enable” option by clicking on the checked box.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-14
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway address fields for each processor via your programming software.
This field:
Subnet Mask
Specifies:
The processor’s subnet mask.
The subnet mask is used to interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets.
Configure by doing the following:
Enter an address of the following form: a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal)
If your network is not divided into subnets, then leave the subnet mask field at the default.. If you change the default and need to reset it, type
0.0.0.0.
Gateway Address The IP address of the gateway that provides a connection to another IP network.
This field is required when you communicate with other devices not on a local subnet.
Enter an address of the following form: a.b.c.d Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal)
The default address is No Gateway.
Using BOOTP to Configure Channel 1 for Processors on Subnets
Configure the BOOTPTAB file according to the subnet mask and gateway address for each SLC 5/05 processor on the link. See the example below and the corresponding BOOTPTAB file on the next page.
IMPORTANT
Because BOOTP requests are seen only on the local subnet, each subnet needs its own BOOTP server and BOOTPTAB file.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
E-15
PC with Windows, HP
9000, or VAX Computer
BOOTP
Server
SLC 5/05 Processor
Subnet A
Ethernet TCP/IP Network
BOOTP
Server
Ethernet
Gateway or Router
130.151.132.1
130.151.194.1
130.151.138.1
130.151.194.xxx
Hostname: Iota1
IP Address: 130.151.194.19
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address: 130.151.194.1
BOOTP
Server
130.151.132.xxx
130.151.138.xxxx
Subnet B
SLC 5/05 Processor
Subnet C
SLC 5/05 Processor
Hostname: Iota2
IP Address: 130.151.132.110
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address: 130.151.132.1
Hostname: Iota3
IP Address: 130.151.138.123
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Gateway Address: 130.151.138.1
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
E-16
Communicating with Devices on an Ethernet Network
The BOOTPTAB files that correspond to this example looks like:
#Legend:gw -- gateways
#ha -- hardware address
#ht -- hardware type
#ip -- host IP address
#sm -- subnet mask
#vm -- BOOTP vendor extensions format
#tc -- template host
#Default string for each type of Ethernet client defaults5E: ht=1:vm=rfc1048:
sm=255.255.255.0
#Entries for SLC 5/05 processors: iota1:\ tc=defaults5E:\
gw=130.151.194.1:\
ha=0000BC1D1234:/ ip=130.151.194.19
#Legend:gw -- gateways
#ha -- hardware address
#ht -- hardware type
#ip -- host IP address
#sm -- subnet mask
#vm -- BOOTP vendor extensions format
#tc -- template host
#Default string for each type of Ethernet client defaults5E: ht=1:vm=rfc1048:
sm=255.255.255.0
#Entries for SLC 5/05 processors: iota2:\ tc=defaults5E:\
gw=130.151.132.1:\
ha=0000BC1D5678:/ ip=130.151.132.110
#Legend:gw -- gateways
#ha -- hardware address
#ht -- hardware type
#ip -- host IP address
#sm -- subnet mask
#vm -- BOOTP vendor extensions format
#tc -- template host
#Default string for each type of Ethernet client defaults5E: ht=1:vm=rfc1048:
sm=255.255.255.0
#Entries for SLC 5/05 processors: iota3:\ tc=defaults5E:\
gw=130.151.138.1:\
ha=0000BC1D9012:/ ip=130.151.138.123
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
F
Power Supply Worksheet
1
Power Supply Loading
Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading for each chassis in your SLC modular application.
Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current (A) at 5V dc at 24V dc
Processors
1747-L511
1747-L514
0.350
0.350
0.105
0.105
1747-L524
1747-L531
1747-L532
1747-L541
0.350
0.500
0.500
1.000
0.105
0.175
0.175
0.200
Input Modules
1747-L542
1747-L543
1747-L551
1747-L552
1747-L553
1746-IA4
1746-IA8
1746-IA16
1746-IB8
1746-IB16
1746-IB32
(1)
1746-IC16
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
0.035
0.050
0.085
0.050
0.085
0.050
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.200
1746-IG16
1746-IH16
1746-IM4
1746-IM8
1746-IM16
1746-IN16
1746-ITB16
1746-ITV16
1746-IV8
1746-IV16
1746-IV32
0.085
0.140
0.085
0.035
0.050
0.085
0.085
0.085
0.085
0.050
0.085
0.050
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
F-2
Power Supply Worksheet
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current (A) at 5V dc at 24V dc
Output Modules
1746-OA8
1746-OA16
1746-OAP12
1746-OB8
0.185
0.370
0.370
0.135
-
-
-
-
0.280
0.190
-
-
1746-OB16
1746-OB32
1746-OBP8
1746-OBP16
1746-OB16E
1746-OB32E
1746-OG16
1746-OV8
1746-OV16
1746-OVP16
1746-OW4
0.135
0.250
0.135
0.190
0.180
0.135
0.270
0.190
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Input and Output
Modules
Specialty Modules
1746-OW8
1746-OW16
1746-OX8
1746-IO4
1746-IO8
1746-IO12
1746-IO12DC
1746-BAS (-T)
1746-BLM
1746-BTM
1746-FIO4I
1746-FIO4V
1746-HSCE
1746-HSCE2
1746-HSRV
1746-HSTP1
1746-INT4
1746-MPM
1746-NI4
1746-NI8
1746-NI16 (I/V)
1746-NIO4I
1746-NIO4V
0.250
0.045
0.085
0.170
0.085
0.030
0.060
0.090
0.080
0.150
1.000
0.110
0.055
0.055
0.320
0.250
0.300
0.300
0.060
0.110
0.025
0.200
0.125
0.055
0.055
-
-
-
-
-
0.045
0.090
0.180
0.090
0.025
0.045
0.070
0.060
0.040
-
0.085
0.150
0.120
0.040
0.085
0.085
0.100
0.075
0.145
0.115
(2)
Power Supply Worksheet
F-3
Hardware Component Catalog Numbers Maximum Current (A) at 5V dc at 24V dc
Specialty Modules
1746-NO4I
1746-NO4V
1746-NR4
1746-NT4
0.055
0.055
0.050
0.060
0.195
0.145
0.050
0.040
Communication Modules
1746-NT8
1746-QS
1746-QV
1747-ACN15
1747-ACNR15
1747-ASB
1747-BSN
1747-DCM
1747-KE
0.120
1.000
0.215
0.900
0.900
0.375
0.800
0.360
0.150
-
-
-
-
-
0.070
0.200
0
0.040
0
Peripheral Devices
1747-KFC15
1747-SCNR
1747-SDN
1747-SN
1747-AIC
1747-DTAM
0.640
0.900
0.500
0.600
0
0
-
-
-
0.085
(3)
1747-PIC
1747-PSD
1747-PT1
Series A and B
1761-NET-AIC
(4)
0
NA
0
0.350
NA
0
(1) Power supply loading for Series D and later modules.
(2) When using the BAS or KE modules to supply power to an AIC draws its power through the module. Add 0.085A
(the current loading for the AIC) to the BAS or KE module’s power supply loading value at 24V dc.
(3) The 24V dc loading values of the HHT, PIC, and DTAM are included in the 24V dc loading value of the processor.
(4) Current for the 1761-NET-AIC may be supplied from the controller communications port or from an external 24V dc source. No current is consumed from the controller when an external source is used.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
F-4
Power Supply Worksheet
Blank Worksheet
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Procedure
1. For each slot of the chassis that contains a module, list the slot number, the catalog number of the module, and its 5V and 24V maximum currents.
Also include the power consumption of any peripheral devices that may be connected to the processor other than a DTAM, HHT, or PIC—the power consumption of these devices is accounted for in the power consumption of the processor.
Chassis Number Maximum Currents Chassis Number Maximum Currents
Slot Number
Slot
Catalog Number at 5V dc at 24V dc Slot Number
Slot
Catalog Number at 5V dc at 24V dc
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Slot
Peripheral Device
Slot
Slot
Slot
Peripheral Device
Peripheral Device Peripheral Device
2. Add the loading currents of all the system devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current
.
2. Add the loading currents of all the system devices at 5 and 24V dc to determine the
Total Current
.
3. For 1746-P4 power supplies, calculate the total power consumption of all system devices. If you are not using a 1746-P4, go to s tep 4.
Current Multiply by = Watts Current
Total Current at 5V dc 5V Total Current at 5V dc
Multiply by
5V
Total Current at 24V dc
User Current at 24V dc
24V
24V
Total Current at 24V dc
User Current at 24V dc
24V
24V
= Watts
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
Add the Watts values to determine Total Power
(cannot exceed 70 Watts)
4. Choose the power supply from the list of catalog numbers shown below. Compare the Total Current required for the chassis with the Internal Current capacity of the power supplies. Be sure that the Total Current consumption for the chassis is less than the Internal Current Cap acity for the power supply, for both 5V and 24V loads.
Catalog Number Internal Current
Capacity
Catalog Number Internal Current
Capacity
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
1746-P4 (see step 3)
1746-P5
1746-P6
1746-P7
(1)
12V Input
24V Input
Required Power Supply at 5V dc
2.0A
5.0A
3.6A
10.0A
5.0A
5.0A
2.0A
3.6A
at 24V dc
0.46A
0.96A
0.87A
2.88A
0.96A
0.96A
0.46A
0.87A
1746-P1
1746-P2
1746-P3
1746-P4 (see step 3)
1746-P5
1746-P6
1746-P7
12V Input
24V Input
Required Power Supply at 5V dc at 24V dc
2.0A
0.46A
5.0A
3.6A
0.96A
0.87A
10.0A
5.0A
5.0A
2.0A
3.6A
2.88A
0.96A
0.96A
0.46A
0.87A
(1) See P7 currrent capacity chart on page 2-15.
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Appendix
G
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500
Control System
This appendix will assist you in calculating the heat dissipation of your SLC 500 controller. It consists of the following:
• definition of key terms
• table and graphs
• example heat dissipation calculation
• heat dissipation worksheet
To select an enclosure see page 2-18.
Definition of Key Terms
The following terms are used throughout this appendix. Familiarize yourself with them before proceeding further.
Watts per Point
— maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring point when energized.
Minimum Watts
— amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field power present.
Total Watts
— the watts per point plus the minimum watts (with all points energized).
1
Calculating Module Heat
Dissipation
To calculate the heat dissipation of your SLC controller you must consider two things:
• the maximum heat dissipated (with field power applied) by the processor, all I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices for each chassis.
• the heat dissipated by the power supply. This is determined by the maximum load on the power supply of the processor, each
I/O and specialty module, peripheral device, and device drawing power directly off the power supply via the “POWER
OUT” terminals.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
G-2
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Calculated Watts vs. Total Watts
You calculate maximum heat dissipation by using one of these methods:
• calculated watts method
• total watts method
Use
calculated watts
if you know exactly how many outputs and inputs on each card are active at any given time. This method will give you a lower, more accurate heat dissipation calculation than the total watts method. With this method, use the formula below for calculating the heat dissipation of each module. Then use these values in step 1 of the Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
(points energized x watts per point) + minimum watts = heat dissipation of module
Use
total watts
if you are not sure how many points on a module are energized at any time. Total watts is the watts per point (with all points energized) plus the minimum watts. Total watts generated by
each module are provided in the table on page G-3.
Once you have determined which method you will use to calculate the heat dissipation of your modules, see the Example Worksheet for
Calculating Heat Dissipation on page G-8. This worksheet shows you
how to calculate the heat dissipation for the example SLC control
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Hardware
Component
Processors
Input Modules
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-3
Power Supply Loading Reference Table
Use the table below to calculate the power supply loading and heat dissipation for each chassis in your SLC modular application.
Catalog Numbers
1746-IC16
1746-IG16
1746-IH16
1746-IM4
1746-IM8
1746-IM16
1746-IN16
1746-ITB16
1746-ITV16
1746-IV8
1746-IV16
1747-L511
1747-L514
1747-L524
1747-L531
1747-L532
1747-L541
1747-L542
1747-L543
1747-L551
1747-L552
1747-L553
1746-IA4
1746-IA8
1746-IA16
1746-IB8
1746-IB16
1746-IB32
(1)
Watts per Point
0.220
0.020
0.320
0.350
0.350
0.350
0.350
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.200
0.200
NA
NA
NA
NA
0.270
0.270
0.270
0.200
0.200
0.200
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Total Watts
3.95
1.00
3.08
1.60
3.10
6.00
6.00
3.625
3.625
1.90
3.60
6.90
1.30
2.40
4.80
1.90
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
3.60
6.90
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.90
4.00
4.00
Minimum Watts
0.425
0.700
0.675
0.175
0.250
0.425
0.425
0.425
0.425
0.250
0.425
0.530
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
0.175
0.250
0.425
0.250
0.425
0.530
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.90
4.00
4.00
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
G-4
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Hardware
Component
Output Modules
Input and Output Modules
Specialty Modules
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1746-IO12
1746-IO12DC
1746-BAS
1746-BLM
1746-BTM
1746-FIO4I
1746-FIO4V
1746-HSCE
1746-HSCE2
1746-HSRV
1746-HSTP1
1746-INT4
1746-MPM
1746-NI4
1746-NI8
1746-NI16
1746-NIO4I
Catalog Numbers
1746-OA8
1746-OA16
1746-OAP12
1746-OB8
1746-OB16
1746-OB32
1746-OBP8
1746-OBP16
1746-OB16E
1746-OB32E
1746-OG16
1746-OV8
1746-OV16
1746-OV32
1746-OVP16
1746-OW4
1746-OW8
1746-OW16
1746-OX8
1746-IO4
1746-IO8
Watts per Point
0.300
0.310
0.338
0.078
0.033
0.775
0.388
0.078
1.000
0.462
1.000
0.775
0.338
0.078
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
0.310
0.133
0.138
0.033
0.825
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
0.270 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
0.200 per input pt.
0.133 per output pt.
NA
3.760
3.040
1.600
2.170
3.760
Minimum Watts
0.675
1.250
1.400
2.260
0.900
0.675
1.400
2.260
0.925
1.850
1.850
0.675
1.400
2.260
1.250
1.310
2.590
5.170
2.590
0.750
1.380
2.130
1.840
3.750
Total Watts
1.50
6.90
7.60
4.80
3.08
6.21
7.60
4.80
9.00
9.30
10.85
6.90
7.60
4.80
6.21
1.90
3.70
5.70
8.60
1.60
3.00
4.60
3.90
3.800
3.800
3.100
1.600
2.20
3.80
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-5
Hardware
Component
Specialty Modules
Communication Modules
Peripheral Devices
Catalog Numbers
1746-NIO4V
1746-NO4I
1746-NO4V
1746-NR4
1746-NT4
1746-NT8
1746-QS
1746-QV
1747-ACN15
1747-ACNR15
1747-ASB
1747-BSN
1747-DCM
1747-KE
1747-KFC15
1747-SCNR
1747-SDN
1747-SN
1747-AIC
1747-DTAM
1747-PIC
1747-PSD
1747-PT1
Series A and B
1761-NET-AIC
(2)
1761-NET-DNI
1761-NET-ENI
Watts per Point
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum Watts
3.040
4.960
3.780
1.500
0.800
1.875
1.800
3.750
3.200
4.500
2.000
2.500
2.000
NA
2.500
2.500
2.500
2.000
(1) Power supply loading for Series D and later modules.
(2) Current for the 1761-NET-AIC and 1761-NET-ENI may be supplied from the SLC power supply or from an external 24V dc source.
1.875
1.800
3.800
3.200
4.500
2.000
2.500
2.000
NA
2.500
2.500
2.500
2.000
Total Watts
3.10
5.00
3.80
1.500
0.800
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
G-6
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Power Supply Heat Dissipation Graphs
Use the graphs below for determining the power supply dissipation in step 2 of the
Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
.
1746-P1
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
2
0
8
6
4
12
10
20
18
16
14
0 5 10 15 20 25
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
1746-P2
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
2
0
6
4
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
25
1746-P3
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
20
15
10
5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
1746-P4
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
25
20
15
10
5
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
1746-P5
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
20
18
16
14
12
6
4
10
8
2
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
1746-P6
25
20
15
10
5
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
1746-P7
Power Supply Change in Power
Dissipation due to Output Loading
12
2
0
6
4
10
8
20
18
16
14
24V input
12V input
0 20 40 60 80 100
Power Supply Loading (Watts)
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-7
Example Heat Dissipation
Calculation
If your controller consisted of the following hardware components, you would calculate heat dissipation as shown in the worksheet on
DTAM
Peripheral Device
Chassis 1 Chassis 2
Slot 0 1 2 3
Slot
4 5 6 7
User Power to
Peripheral
The following table details the total watts dissipated by the modules and peripheral devices in the above SLC 500 controller. The numbers
were taken from the tables on page G-3.
Slot Number
0
1
2
3
Peripheral
Device
User Power to
Peripheral
Catalog
Number
1747-L511
1746-BAS
1746-IA8
1746-OV8
1747-DTAM
NA
Chassis 1
Min. Watts
1.75
3.750
0.250
0.675
2.500
NA
0
Max. Watts
1.75
3.80
2.40
6.90
2.50
NA
Slot Number
4
5
6
7
NA
NA
Catalog
Number
1746-IA16
1746-IA16
1746-OW16
1746-OW16
NA
NA
Chassis 2
Min. Watts
0.425
0.425
5.170
5.170
NA
2.400
(1)
Max. Watts
4.800
4.800
5.500
(2)
5.700
NA
NA
(1) The user power on the 1746-P1 power supply for Chassis 2 is being used to power a peripheral (100 mA at 24V dc).
(2) This output card uses 5.5 Watts because only 10 points are on at any one time. Using the calculated watts formula - (number of p oints energized x watts per point) + minimum watts = heat dissipation of module - the calculated watts for the 1746-OW16 module is 5.5W: (10 points x.33) + 5.17 = 5.5W.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
G-8
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Example Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
Procedure:
1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
a. Write in the watts (calculated watts or total watts, see page 12) dissipated by the processor, I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices attached to the processor. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 3
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
L511 1.75
BAS 3.8
IA8 2.4
OV8 6.9
IA16 4.8
IA16 4.8
OW16 5.5
OW16 5.7
peripheral device: peripheral device:
Total:
DTAM 2.5
17.35
20.8
b. Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.
2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.
a. Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis (write in the minimum
watts) for each device (see page G-3) add these values together.
Important:
If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the current used. Include user power in the total power supply loading
Chassis 1
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 3
Cat No Min Ht Dis
17.35
20.8
—
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
L511 1.75
BAS 3.750
IA8 0.250
OV8 0.675
IA16 0.425
IA16 0.425
OW16 5.17
OW16 5.17
user power peripheral device: peripheral device:
DTAM 2.5
2.4
Total: 8.925
13.59
b. Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page G-6 to
determine the power supply dissipation. Place the power supply dissipations into the appropriate columns.
3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.
4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of your controller.
5. Convert to BTUs/hr by multiplying the total heat dissipation of your controller by
3.414.
13.0
30.35
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
15.0
—
35.8
—
Total (Watts):
Total BTUs/hr):
66.15
225.84
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
G-9
Blank Worksheet for Calculating Heat Dissipation
Procedure:
1. Calculate the heat dissipation for each chassis without the power supply.
a. Write in the watts (calculated watts or total watts, see page 12) dissipated by the processor, I/O and specialty modules, and any peripheral devices attached to the processor. Then, for each chassis, add these values together.
Chassis 1
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 3
Cat No Ht Dis
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
peripheral device: peripheral device:
Total:
b. Place the heat dissipation for each chassis into the appropriate columns.
2. Calculate the heat dissipation for each power supply.
a. Calculate the power supply loading for each chassis (write in the minimum
watts) for each device (see page G-3) add these values together.
Important:
If you have a device connected to user power, multiply 24V by the current used. Include user power in the total power supply loading
Chassis 1
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 2
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 3
Cat No Min Ht Dis
Chassis 1 Chassis 2 Chassis 3 Heat Dissipation
user power peripheral device: peripheral device:
Total:
b. Use the power supply loading for each chassis and the graphs on page G-6 to
determine the power supply dissipation. Place the power supply dissipations into the appropriate columns.
3. Add the chassis dissipation to the power supply dissipation.
4. Add across the columns for the total heat dissipation of your controller.
Total (Watts):
5. Convert to BTUs/hr by multiplying the total heat dissipation of your controller by
3.414.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
G-10
Calculating Heat Dissipation for the SLC 500 Control System
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
1
Glossary
The following terms are used throughout this manual. Refer to the
Allen-Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary
, Publication Number
AG-7.1, for a complete guide to Allen-Bradley technical terms.
address
A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location. For example, I:1/0 is the memory address for data located in Input file word 1, bit 0.
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
A device that provides RS-232 isolation to an RS-485 Half-Duplex communication link. (Catalog Number 1761-NET-AIC.)
application
1) A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller.
2) The use of computer- or processor-based routines for specific purposes.
Auto Answer
Type of modem that has self-contained timeouts and tests. They can answer and hang the phone up automatically.
Backplane Current Draw
The amount of current the module requires from the backplane. The sum of the backplane current draw for all modules in a chassis is used to select the appropriate chassis power supply.
Baud Rate
The speed of communication between devices on a network. All devices must communicate at the same baud rate. For example, the
DH-485 network devices default to 19,200 baud.
bit
The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic, where the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF.
block diagrams
A method used to illustrate logic components or a sequence of events.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Boolean operators
Logical operators such as AND, OR, NAND, NOR, NOT, and
Exclusive-OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits. Can have an output response of T or F.
branch
A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program. Its primary use is to build OR logic.
Calculated Watts
The amount of heat generated by those points energized on an I/O module.
Channel
Communication port on a module.
Chassis
A hardware assembly that houses devices such as I/O modules, adapter modules, processor modules, and power supplies.
communication scan
A part of the controller’s operating cycle. Communication with devices
(such as other controllers and operator interface devices) takes place during this period.
Continuous Current Per Module
The maximum current for each module. The sum of the output current for each point should not exceed this value.
Continuous Current Per Point
The maximum current each output is designed to continuously supply to a load.
control program
User logic (the application) that defines the controller’s operation.
controller
A device, such as a programmable controller, used to control output devices.
Glossary
3 controller overhead
A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes
(memory checks, tests, comunications, etc.).
control profile
The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions.
counter
A device that counts the occurrence of some event.
CPU (Central Processing Unit)
The decision-making and data storage section of a programmable controller.
data table
The part of processor memory that contains I/O status and files where user data (such as bit, integer, timers, and counters) is monitored, manipulated, and changed for control purposes.
DF1 protocol
A peer-to-peer link-layer protocol that combines features of ANSI
X3.28-1976 specification subcategories D1 (data transparency) and F1
(two-way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses).
DIN rail
Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus (DIN) standards, a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your devices.
Direct Connect
type of modem that is connected to a dedicated, leased phone line and is active at all times.
DH
++++
Data Highway Plus implements peer-to-peer communication with a token-passing scheme to rotate link mastership among the nodes connected to that link. Data Highway Plus has the capability for online programming and is optimized for networks with fewer nodes
(Data Highway Plus supports up to 64 nodes).
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
4
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
DH-485 Network
The DH-485 network is a collection of devices connected to the communication cable allowing information exchange. A communication network based on the EIA Standard for RS-485 using an Allen-Bradley proprietary protocol.
Discrete Input and Output (DIO)
The discrete input and output is the transfer of one to 32 words between a SLC-500 processor and a scanner. All 32 words of input data and all 32 words of output data are updated on each SLC program scan.
download
The transfer of program or data files to a device.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTE Controlled Answer
Type of modem that is unattended and is attached directly to the phone lines. The interface module or the SLC 5/03 processor acts as the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) which controls the modem via the DTR and RTS signals. The module incorporates timeouts and tests to properly operate these types of modems.
DTR Dialing (SLC 5/03 only)
Type of modem that lets you dial a number or end a call based on the status of the RS232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) signal. To program the modem initialization string and phone number into the internal memory of the modem, use a dumb terminal (or PC running terminal emulation software like Procomm, Window’s Terminal, or PBASE).
Once you have programmed the modem, activate the DTR signal to dial the number, or deactivate the DTR signal to end the call.
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module used to store, back-up, or transfer SLC 500 programs. The SLC 500 can read and write to an EEPROM.
EMI
Electromagnetic interference.
Glossary
5 encoder
A device that detects position, and transmits a signal representing that position.
Ethernet Network
A local area network with a baseband communication rate of 10M bits per second.
executing mode
Any run or test mode.
false
The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.
FIFO (First-In-First-Out)
The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file.
file
A collection of data or logic organized into groups.
Flash EPROM
Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module. It combines the programming versatility of EEPROMs with the security precautions of UVPROMs. This means that you have the option of leaving your EPROM programs write protected or unprotected.
Full-duplex
A high-performance protocol that allows simultaneous two-way data transmission. For point-to-point applications only.
Half-duplex
A high-performance protocol where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time. Used in point-to-point and multi-point applications.
hard disk
A storage device in a personal computer.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
high byte
Bits 8 to 15 of a word.
housekeeping
The portion of the scan when the controller performs internal checks and services comunications.
Initiator
A node on the DH-485 network capable of acting as a master. When an initiator has the token it can send messages and request replies from any node on the DH-485 network. A personal computer running your programming software is an initiator on the data link. The SLC
5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, and SLC 5/05 processors can also be initiators.
Input Device
A device, such as a push button or a switch, that supplies signals through input circuits to a programmable controller.
input scan
The controller reads all input devices connected to the input terminals.
Inrush Current
The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized.
instruction
A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor.
A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions.
The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false. In turn, the controller sets the output instructions to true or false.
instruction set
The set of instructions available within a controller.
I/O
Inputs and Outputs
Glossary
7
IP Address
A 32-bit address assigned to hosts that want to participate in a TCP/IP internet. IP addresses are the abstraction of physical hardware addresses, with a network and host partition which makes routing efficient.
Isolated Link Coupler
The link coupler provides an electrically isolated network connection for an SLC 500 controller (processor or programming station). The link couplers connect the daisy-chained DH-485 communication cable.
ladder logic
A graphical programming format resembling a ladder-like diagram.
The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language.
least significant bit (LSB)
The element (or bit) in a binary word that carries the smallest value of weight.
LED
Light Emitting Diode. Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs.
LIFO (Last-In-First-Out)
The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file.
low byte
Bits 0 to 7 of a word.
logic
A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions.
Manual
Typically an acoustically coupled type of modem. The connection is established by a person on each end of the phone line. They then insert the handsets into an acoustic coupler to complete the connection.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Master Control Relay (MCR)
A hard-wired relay that can be de-energized by any series-connected emergency stop switch.
mnemonic
A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information.
modem
Modulator/demodulator. Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line.
modes
Selected methods of operation. Example: run, test, or program.
Maximum Watts
The maximum amount of heat that the module generates with field power present.
Minimum Load Current
The lowest amount of current the output is designed to operate at.
Operating at or below this value is not reliable.
Minimum Watts
The amount of heat dissipation that can occur when there is no field power present.
Multi-master network
A network in which more than one node has the ability to initiate communications and initialize the link.
M0/M1 File Transfer
A M1/M0 file transfer is a method of moving large amounts of data between a SLC 500 processor and its scanner. It transfers files containing a maximum of 256 words and may take more than one SLC program scan to complete.
negative logic
The use of binary logic in such a way that “0” represents the desired voltage level.
Glossary
9
Network
A series of stations (nodes) connected by some type of communication medium. A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links.
Node
Also called a station. An address or software location on the network.
Nominal Input Current
The current at nominal input voltage.
normally closed
Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de-energized or deactivated. They are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated.
normally open
Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de-energized or the switch is deactivated. They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated.
off-delay time
The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller. The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any applied filter.
offline
When a device is not scanning/controlling or when a programming device is not communicating with the controller.
offset
A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point.
Off-State Current
For input circuits, the maximum amount of leakage current allowed from an input device in its Off-state.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
off-state leakage current
When a mechanical switch is opened (off-state), no current flows through the switch. Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches, have a small current flow when they are in the off state. This current is referred to as the off-state leakage current. To ensure reliable operation, the off-state leakage current rating must be less than the minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected.
Off-State Voltage (max)
The maximum input voltage level detected as an Off condition by the input module.
on-delay time
The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller.
one shot
A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program scan.
online
When a device is scanning/controlling or when a programming device is communicating with the controller.
On-State Voltage Drop
The voltage developed across the output driver circuit during the On state at maximum load current.
Operating Voltage
For inputs, the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state. For outputs, the allowable range of user-supplied voltage.
Output Device
A device, such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil, that is energized by the programmable controller.
output scan
The controller turns on, off, or modifies the devices connected to the output terminals.
Glossary
11
Points per Common
The number of input or output points connected to a single return
(common) or supply (vcc).
Poll Message
A poll message is a point-to-point transfer of data sent by the scanner that solicits a response from a single device. The device responds with its data bit and status bit.
processor
A Central Processing Unit. (See CPU.)
processor files
The set of program and data files resident in the controller.
program file
Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs. SLC controllers support multiple program files.
program mode
When the controller is not scanning the control program.
program scan
A part of the controller’s operating cycle. During the program scan, the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated.
programming device
Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams.
Protocol
The “language” or packaging of information that is transmitted across a network.
(I/O) Rack
An I/O addressing unit that corresponds to 8 input image-table words and 8 output image-table words. A rack can contain a maximum of 8
I/O groups for up to 128 discrete I/O.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
12
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
read
To acquire data. For example, the processor reads information from other devices via a read message.
relay
An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits.
relay logic
A representation of binary or discrete logic.
Remote I/O Network
A network where the communication between the processor and the
I/O is across a serial link.
restore
To transfer a program from a device to a controller.
reserved bit
A location reserved for internal use.
retentive data
Information (data) that is preserved through power cycles.
RS-232
An EIA standard that specifies electrical, mechanical, and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits.
RTB
Removable Terminal Block.
run mode
An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program.
rung
A rung contains input and output instructions. During Run mode, the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false. If a path of true
Glossary
13
logic exists, the outputs are made true (energized). If all paths are false, the outputs are made false (de-energized).
save
To save a program to a computer hard disk.
scan
The scan is made up of four elements: input scan, program scan, output scan, and housekeeping.
scan time
The time required for the controller to complet one scan.
Signal Delay
For inputs, the response time required to transmit the circuit status from the field wiring to the digital logic. For outputs, the time required to transmit the circuit status from digital logic to the output wiring.
sinking
A term used to describe current flow between two devices. A sinking device provides a direct path to ground.
sinking/sourcing
Describes a current signal flow relationship between field input and output devices in a control system and their power supply. Sourcing
I/O modules supply (or source) current to sinking field devices.
Sinking I/O modules receive (or sink) current from sourcing field devices.
sourcing
A term used to describe current flow between two devices. A sourcing device or circuit provides power.
status
The condition of a circuit or system.
Strobe Message
A strobe message is a multicast transfer of data sent by the scanner that solicits a response from each slave device. The devices respond
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
14
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Surge Current Per Point
The maximum amplitude and duration (pulse) of current allowed for a given period of time and temperature.
Surge Suppressor
A device used to absorb voltage transients created by energizing an inductive load to reduce electrical noise or to protect the output circuit. For example, an R-C network, MOV (metal oxide varistor) or diode.
terminal
A point on an I/O module that external devices, such as a push button or pilot light, are wired to.
throughput
The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding output turns on or off. Throughput consists of input delays, program scan, output delays, and overhead.
Token
The logical right to initiate communications. In a multi-master network a single token is passed between initiators to make sure two nodes do not transmit at the same time.
true
The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung.
upload
Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage device.
UVPROM
An Ultra-Violet light erasable Programmable Read Only Memory module used to back-up, store, or transfer SLC 500 programs. The
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 can only read from a UVPROM. An external
PROM programmer is used to program (write to) the device.
Voltage Category
The nominal voltage used to describe the module.
Glossary
15 watchdog timer
A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle. If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period, it causes a fault.
Watts Per Point
The maximum heat dissipation that can occur in each field wiring point when energized.
write
To send data to another device. For example, the processor writes data to another device with a message write instruction.
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
16
Glossary
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Index
1761-NET-DNI
Numerics
1770-KF3 module
1746-BAS module
1771-KGM module
1746-C7 cable
1746-C9 cable
1784-KT/B card
1746-P1 power supply
1784-KTX card
1784-KTXD card
1784-PCMK card
1785-KA5 module
1746-P2 power supply
on the data highway plus network C-6
24V dc user power output voltage
2760-RB module
5/01 processor
1746-P3 power supply
special considerations for grounding 3-6
5/02 processors
1746-P4 power supply
1746-P6 power supply
1746-P7 power supply
5/03 processor
active modem-control lines
1747-AIC link coupler
connecting the communication cable A-12
using on the DH-485 network A-4
1747-BA, lithium battery
1747-KE module
as an RS-232 communication device B-3
1747-KFC15
1747-L511 processor
1747-L514 processor
1747-L524 processor
returning processor to “initial factory conditions” 10-17
1747-L532 processor
1747-L541 processor
5/04 processors
1747-L542 processor
active modem-control lines
1747-L543 processor
1747-L551 processor
1747-L552 processor
1747-L553 processor
1747-M12 Flash EPROM
channel 0, RS-232 communication C-2
1747-M5 adapter socket
1747-SDN
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
2
Index
returning processor to “initial factory conditions” 10-17
5/05 processor
5/05 processors
returning processor to ”initial factory conditions” 10-17
A
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter
ambient operating temperature rating, for power supplies
ambient temperature rating, processor specification
application
B
BASIC programming language
batteries, lithium
Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a 9-2
DOT-E7052 provision 9-2 shipping when depleted 9-2
battery
installation
SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processors 9-3
SLC 5/03 and higher processors 9-4
Belden #9463
Belden #9842
wire/terminal connections A-13
bit
BOOTP
edit configuration file E-8 install E-8
branch
C
cables
certification
channel 0
chassis
13-slot modular mounting dimensions 4-2
chassis interconnect cables, installation of
clock, real-time
SLC 5/05 processors 5-12, 5-13
Common Power Source
common techniques used in this manual
communication interface, RS-232
communication protocols
configuring
contact protection
RC network 2-28 surge suppressor 2-28 varistor 2-28
contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance
Control Networks
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Index
3 control profile
control program
controller
ControlNet Network
ControlNet Scanner
counters
CPU (central processing unit), definition
CTS (Clear to Send)
D
data highway plus communication protocol
using the SLC 5/04 processors C-2
wiring the SLC 5/04 processors C-4
data packets
Data Table Access Module
DCD (Data Carrier Detect)
DCE (Data Communication Equipment)
DF1 half-duplex protocol
DF1 protocol
DH+ network
devices that use the
DH-485 interface converter
DH-485 network
devices that use the
example system configuration A-5
grounding and terminating A-14
DH-485/RS-232 Interface Module user’s manual
discrete I/O modules
DOS host
DSR (Data Set Ready)
DTAM Micro
DTAM Plus
DTE (Data Terminal Equipment)
DTE, definition
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
E
EEPROM
EEPROM burning options
emergency controller shutdown
EmergencyStop Switches
EMI
enclosures
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
4
Index
encoder
end device
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
equipment needed for installation
errors
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 processors 10-4
while downloading an operating system 10-15
Ethernet
messaging E-2 processor performance E-2
using the SLC 5/05 processors E-1
European Union Directive Compliance
European Union Directives
F
false
features
SLC 5/05 processors 5-12, 5-13
FIFO (First-In-First-Out)
file
full-duplex
fuse protection, power supply specification
fuses, for power supply
G
getting started quickly
Required Tools and Equipment 1-2
grounding guidelines
special considerations for DC applications using 1746-P3
H
half-duplex master protocol, A-B products that support
hazardous environment
selecting hardware components 2-25
high byte
housekeeping
humidity rating, power supply specification
humidity, processor specification
I
I/O devices, recommendations for wiring
terminals, identify 7-5 wires, bundle 7-5 wires, label 7-5
I/O modules
I/O modules, wiring
IBM AT connector pin assignment
IBM compatible computer, programming with
input modules
input scan
input states on power down
installation
chassis interconnect cables 6-8
lithium battery on SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processors 9-3
lithium battery on SLC 5/03 and higher processors 9-4
installing
instruction
instruction set
interface converter (1747-PIC)
internal current capacity, power supply specification
isolated link coupler
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Index
5
example calculation 2-24 selecting 2-24
J
jumpers
K
keyswitch
clearing faults for the SLC 5/03 and higher processors
keyswitch location
SLC 5/05 processors 5-12, 5-13
keyswitch positions for the SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04 processors
L
line voltage variations, excessive
line voltage, power supply specification
link coupler
lithium batteries
Code of Federal Regulations, 49 CFR 173.22a 9-2
installing on SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processors 9-3
installing on SLC 5/03 and higher processors 9-4
local I/O capacity, processor specification
M
machine motion, preventing
master control relay (MCR)
master devices, DF1 half-duplex protocol
maximum inrush current, power supply specification
memory backup options, processor specification
memory modules
for SLC 5/01 and 5/02 processors 2-20
for SLC 5/03 and higher processors 2-21
mnemonic
modem
modems
modes
modules, installation
motor starters (bulletin 509)
motor starters (bulletin 709)
Mounting
Data Terminal Access Module (DTAM) 4-5
DTAM Micro Operator Interface 4-1
DTAM Plus Operator Interface 4-5
Modular Hardware Style Units 4-1
mounting dimensions
AIC+ Advanced Interface Converter 4-6
N
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
negative logic
noise generators
noise immunity, processor specification
normally closed
normally open
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
6
Index
O
offline
offset
one shot
online
operator interface
selecting
output contact protection, selecting
output modules
output scan
Overview of the Modular Control System
P
PanelView 550 Operator Terminal
performance
planning considerations for a network
Power Considerations
Input States on Power Down 3-11 line conditions, other types of 3-11
power source, loss of
power supplies
specifications
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
power supply fuse
power, removing
Preventing Excessive Heat
Preventive Maintenance
processor
processor files
processor hardware features
processor specifications
ambient temperature rating 2-11 certification 2-11 humidity 2-11
PROG, keyswitch position for the SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04
program alteration
program file
program memory, processor specification
program mode
program scan
program scan hold-up time after loss of power
Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring
Guidelines
publications, related
pulses
Index
7
Q
Quick Start for Experienced Users
1771-KGM
R
1775-KA
RAM, power back-up
SLC 5/01 or SLC 5/02 processors 9-3
SLC 5/03 and higher processors 9-4
2760-RB
RC network
5130-RM
read
related publications
IBM AT to an SLC 5/03 processor B-10
PLC-5
relays, surge suppressors for
REM, keyswitch position for the SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04
processors
remote I/O capacity, processor specification
SLC 5/03 processor
to an IBM AT (with cable 1747-CP3) B-12
remote I/O passthru
Removable Terminal Blocks (RTB)
RS-232 devices
removing power from the SLC 500 control system
RS-232, definition
RTB
Replacing a fuse on the Power Supply
RTS (Request to Send)
run mode
reserved bit
RUN, keyswitch position for SLC 5/03 and SLC 5/04 processors
retainer clips
rung
Rockwell Automation
S
Safety Considerations
master control relay circuits, periodic tests of 3-13
RS-232
SCADA applications
scan
SLC 500 devices that support B-3
scan time
RS-232 connector pin assignments
scan time, processor specification
1746-BAS
selecting
1747-KE
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
8
Index
SLC 5/01 and SLC 5/02 memory modules 2-20
SLC 5/03 and higher memory modules 2-21
shock (operating), processor specification
sinking
Sinking Device with Sourcing Input Module Circuit 7-2
Sinking Device with Sourcing Output Module Circuit 7-3
solidstate DC I/O circuits 7-2
Sourcing Device with Sinking Input Module 7-2
Sourcing Device with Sinking Output Module Circuit 7-3
slave devices, DF1 half-duplex protocol
SLC 5/03 processor
channel 0, RS-232 communication B-2
SLC 5/04 processors
channel 0, RS-232 communication B-2
SLC 5/05
SLC 5/05 processors
channel 0, RS-232 communication B-2
SLC 500 Programmable Controllers
selecting a memory module 2-20, 2-21
Selecting Discrete I/O Modules 2-12
Selecting Isloation Transformers 2-24
Selecting Speciality I/O Modules 2-12
Spacing Your Controllers
specifications
power supplies
processors
ambient temperature rating 2-11 certification 2-11 clock/calendar accuracy 2-11 humidity 2-11
start-up instructions
Starting Up Your Control System
disconnect motion-causing devices 8-2
enter and test your program 8-9
status
storage temperature, power supply specification
surge suppression circuits
surge suppressors
for motor starters 2-28 for relays 2-28
system test
T
terminal
testing
throughput
tools needed for installation
transistor output transient pulses
troubleshooting
contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance P-3
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Index
9
SLC 5/03 and higher processors
errors while downloading an operating system 10-15
troubleshooting, tips for
typical line power requirement, power supply
U
upload
using memory modules (EEPROM and UVPROM)
V
varistor
vibration, processor specification
W
wire types
wire/terminal connections, for Belden #9842
wiring
wiring layout, preparing your
wiring, power supply specification
write
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
10
Index
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
Allen-Bradley PLCs
Publication 1747-UM011C-EN-P - December 2001
11
Supersedes Publication 1747-6.2 - January 1998 © 2001 Rockwell International Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A.
Advertisement
Key features
- Customizable modular design
- Variety of I/O modules for different signal types
- Powerful processing capabilities
- Communication options for networking and remote access
- Compact and rugged design for harsh industrial environments
- Easy to program and use with RSLogix 500 software
- Reliable and proven technology with a long history of successful applications